Home

Enterprise User Manual 901C- Low Res

1. 2 22 22 269 Fault Descriptions 22 2222 270 Relay SelU Distr eee sles eae 271 IED Network Fault Numbering 274 VisDID Setup 279 VisDID Mimll o stern ese ten Ue notes gid hares 280 Sampe PIC snares tas aaan a es 2 lees 280 MG GSE lt 2 cide cetid nti aloal a A sane tot oe 281 MessageList xml 2 2 02eee eee eeeeee 285 SGMple Hille 4 5 Jaztcieeves acl eels see fe tals 285 Tag Ustictioceucie ieee a bt leeweuteddate 285 Table of Contents Table of Contents This page has been intentionally left blank End User License Agreement End User License Agreement SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT AND LIMITED WARRANTY THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE USER YOU AND INNOVATIVE ELECTRONIC DESIGNS IED RELATING TO SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION COLLECTIVELY SOFTWARE PROVIDED WITH IED AUDIO COMPONENTS PRODUCTS OBTAINED FROM IED OR ITS AUTHORIZED CONTRACTORS BY INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS LICENSE AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS License In return for payment of the license fee which is part of the price for the Products and Your agreement to abide by the terms ofthis License IED grants to You a non exclusive non transferable right to use the Software solely in connection with use of the Products You may not copy the Software except for archival or backup purposes You acknowledge that IED
2. Figure 12 11 User Options Contiguration options tor Time Talker announcements are as follows Time Format Select either 12 or 24 hour time format tor the audio announcements initiated by Time Talker On Error Retry When checked Time Talker will attempt a retry it it receives an error when attempting to initiate an announcement When not checked it will simply ignore the error and try again at the next event time 191 Will TED Chapter 12 TimeTalker 0 tinvative tectonic pastas Announce AM PM When checked the AM PM designations will be appended to the time in the announcement When left unchecked the announcement will include the hour and minutes without the AM PM appended to the announcement Time Announcement Prefix Two announcement lead ins are available to precede each time announcement Select either The Current Local Time is or The Local Time is to precede the time announcement Play Chimes Select to either enable or disable a chime tone to play betore the announcement to draw attention to the message Hours of Operation The times during which time announcements are played are individually contigured tor each day e Day checkboxes Check a box to enable announcements on each day e Start End Time Define the time window for each day when announcements will play e All Day button Press this button to quickly set the announcements to play all day for the selected day 12 00AM 1 1
3. Single Mic i C Set Test Legacy Rack Mount ACS Chooses Set Level Test Level Deviation Start Close 30 Figure 14 8 Monitor Mics Window Volume Click the up or down arrows to adjust the volume of the monitor output This is an output physically located on the 590A card and is used to drive a powered speaker that is usually the speaker located in the rack mount microphone station Level This meter displays the current signal level for the selected mic station Mics droplist This is a list of mic stations in the system that are available for monitoring Select a mic station from this list to activate monitoring Single Circuit radio button This selects the function that will be performed when the Start button is pressed Choose Set to run an individual set for the selected mic station Choose Test to run an individual test for the selected mic station Bus droplist This drop down list allows an individual bus to be used for the test Select a bus to use for the test or select ACS choose to allow the ACS to select the appropriate bus to use for the test 224 iin JED innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 14 596 Series Test Configuration Result Label The result of the test or set is displayed on the lower part of the window above the buttons The set level test level and deviation are displayed tor a mic station atter a test or set has been executed for that mic station Start Cl
4. Add Delete Add Edit Delete OK Figure 13 5 Application Area Management Click the Add button under the Application Area Names list to create a new application area The window below will prompt for a name of the new application area Clicking the Delete button will remove the application area and all associated permissions trom the system Add Application Area I X Hame of New Application Area rT Cancel Figure 13 6 Add Application Area Click the Add button under the Permissions list to create a new permission for the selected application area Fill in the information as needed in the Add Permission window shown below and click the OK button to save Add Permission ES Application Area JACSDLL Permission Hame Doo O O Permission Slot f Permissionn Avallable Grant this Permission to all Users Hk Cancel Figure 13 7 Add Permission 199 Will TED Chapter 13 Password Management Innovative Electronic Designs Configure Server Selecting this menu item the Contig button trom the Password Manager utility opens the IED Security Server Parameters window The contiguration options are displayed across two tabs Options and Language Options Tab The Options tab appears as shown in Figure 13 8 This tab is divided into three areas Startup Options Login Options and Automatic Logout Options IED Security Server Parameters l Basumnnnnannnnnnnna nnna St
5. Load This option is used to load channel settings from a file Selecting this option will cause the Load Channel Settings dialog window to appear as shown in Figure 2 22 Save As This option is used to save all channel settings to a file That file can be used as a backup to restore settings in the event of a hardware replacement or to easily re use settings from one channel to another Selecting this option will cause the Save Channel Settings dialog window to appear as shown in Figure 2 21 Print This option will launch the IED Print Manager application Figure 2 24 to allow the printing of various system reports Refer to the IED Print Manager section of this manual for details on using this application o7 Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration 38 amp IED Print Manager Application Help Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Pad Logout Available Reports Details fe Languages t Mics eal Takes S FAS Variables zones Zone Groups JEntry Code Definitions R PDRP Messages EA System Settings 24 Mic Station Users eg Priorities Announcement Definitions AA User Groups Ss FAS Templates aj Companies Titan Auto Test Configuration Ki ambient Analysis Configuration K Ambient Sensors Descriptions oF Channel Zone Assignements Training Room Titan ACS 550 Training Room Titan ACS 550 Training Room IPAU 605 Training Room IPAU 605 Training
6. Background Music Source Drop list used to select the background music source for the channel 22 iin JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Background Music Source 20 Local BGM 21 Internal Bae 9 22 Internal Bus 10 23 Internal Bus 11 24 Internal Bus 12 25 Internal Bus 13 26 Internal Bus 14 27 Internal Bus 15 Figure 2 8 Background Music Source Selection e Volume Level Volume for the selected background music source for the channel e Duck level Amount in negative dB that this channel will be reduced when a page is made to the channel e Mute Checkbox used to mute the input Page Zone e Page Zone Drop list used to select the page zone assigned to the channel All page zones assigned to this frame will be available in this list Page one J10 Gate Cs To j i Sate j z ae 11 Ticketing 4rea 12 Baggage Claim 4 13 Baggage Claim B 14 Upper Curbside 15 Lower Curbside 16 Concourse 4 1 Concourse B Figure 2 9 Page Zone Selection e Volume Level Volume for the page source for the channel Note For most applications this level setting should be set at 12 5dB e Zone Status Information regarding the current state of the zone e Zone State Idle or Active e Page Bus Bus number used for the current announcement or message e Page Priority Priority of the current announcement or message 1 to 254 e Mute Ch
7. Figure 2 33 EQ Display Frequency Scale Octave This option displays the horizontal axis with divisions of equal width using a linear scale Parametric Equalizer Yy d gt 20 315 63 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 8K 12 5K 20K Bypass EQ selectedeand 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Type Center Freq Hz Gain dB Bandwidth Oct Peaking gt 219 1 0 A 0 573 Set Flat Figure 2 34 Octave Scale Decade This option displays the horizontal axis with divisions of varying width using a logarithmic scale 43 Will TED Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Innovative Electronic Designs Parametric Equalizer Y 15 a Gain se maiS taala z0 30 50 100 200 300 500 1K 2k OSE 5K 10k 20k Ta Bypass EQ Selected Band Type Center Freq Hz Gain dB Bandwidth Oct Peaking 219 1 0 0 573 Set Flat Figure 2 35 Decade Scale O dB Location This menu controls the position of the OdB reterence point on the trequency response curve display When used in conjunction with the Legend Scale the vertical range of the graph can be tailored to give the necessary resolution necessary to meet the needs of the application The current reference point location is shown with a check mark next to the option EQ Options Legend Scale d Frequency Scale Mid Upper w Center w Show Gain Show Phase ee so hei H OCONI Figure 2 36 EQ Display 0 dB Location e Top Display a range fr
8. Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 4 Microphone Station Setup Note For systems with the Flight Announcement System FAS installed a mic station can only play FAS announcements to gates that are in the Assigned Gates list For 528 series mic stations only flights that are assigned to gates in the Assigned Gates list will appear for selection on the mic station display When prompted for a gate number on the 528 mic station pressing the ENTER button will use a default of the first gate listed in the Assigned Gates list Key amp Button Assignments Tab This tab is used to assign zone groups to individual buttons 500 and 520 series mic stations It also assigns zone groups to the Combined Zone Groups feature of the system Mic Station Editor xj General Permissions amp User Settings Groups Companies amp Gates Key amp Button Assignements Sidekick f_4 OCNELE NNAS PE 101 101 Mic Switch Code Gombined Zone Group Entry Gode Ji Entry 1 1000 Mic Button amp ssignments PDRP Zonemap Override 0 None 0 None 0 None 0 None one 0 N A Ww N bee bee f lt 4 Previous P Next OK Cancel Figure 4 8 Key amp Button Assignments Tab Combined Zone Groups Combined zone groups is a unique feature allows the mic station entry codes 5 to combine zone groups on the fly The typical application for this feature is to provide a consistent paging scheme for larg
9. Low Byte ITTI o o ME a maa a a Byte3 I I rrr Bytes TTT PLELE lt 4 Previous gt Next Figure 5 4 User Group Editor Advanced Options Will TED Chapter 5 Mic Station Security Innovative Electronic Designs Edit Click the Edit button to bring up the editor form for the user group selected in the User Group Viewer Alternatively double clicking on a user group in the viewer will also open the editor User Groups Description elta Air Lines Show Advanced Options gt gt 4 Previous b Next Figure 5 5 User Group Editor Editing an existing user group opens a window with two additional buttons Clicking on the Previous and Next buttons allows quick navigation to the previous and next records in the viewer Navigating to a new record via the Next and Previous buttons atter making changes to the data in the editor will result in a contirmation prompt as shown in Figure 5 6 The prompt options are as follows e Yes Save current changes before navigating away e No Do not save changes before navigating away e Yes to All Save current and all subsequent changes while navigating using the Previous and Next buttons without any additional prompts x y Data has changed Do you want to save current data before mowing to another one 2 Mo Yes to all Figure 5 6 Edit Confirmation Dialog Box Edit a User Group The steps necessary to edit an existing User G
10. _ Click on the Zones icon trom the Enterprise Navigator window to open the Zones Viewer Highlight a Zone in the Zones Viewer Click the Edit button to open the Zone Editor Make the necessary changes to the data on the form oe Click the OK button to save the changes and close the window Note The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to discard changes and return to the viewer form Delete Click the Delete button to remove the selected Zone from the system The user is prompted for contirmation Delete Confirmation Dialog Box on page 124 before the selected record is erased In addition to erasing one record at a time multiple zones can be selected at once Select multiple messages by holding down the CTRL key while clicking on the records Click the Delete button after all selections have been made x Are you sure you want to delete selected record s Fi Mo Cancel 4 Figure 8 7 Delete Contirmation Dialog Box Delete a Zone 1 Click on the Zones icon from the Enterprise Navigator window to open the viewer 2 Highlight a zone in the viewer window or select multiple zones by holding down the CTRL key while clicking 3 Click the Delete button located on the toolbar 4 Click the Yes button to delete the selected zone s The Cancel or No buttons can be clicked at any time to cancel the delete operation and return to the viewer form Filter Click the Filter butt
11. Card 2 Enabled r Channel 24 11 Ticketing Grea Channel 26 12 Baggage Claim 4 Card 3 Enabled r Channel 34 13 Baggage Claim B r Channel 38 14 Upper Curbside Card 4 Enabled r Channel 44 15 Lower Curbside r Channel 46 16 Concourse 4 D Card 5 Enabled SY Channel 54 17 Concourse B r Channel 58 18 Concourse C Card 6 Enabled Channel 64 19 Security Checkpoint Queing Channel 6B 20 Security Checkpoint Card 7 Enabled Channel 74 21 Food Court Channel 76 22 Rental Car Area Card 8 Enabled r Channel 84 23 Parking Garage Ww Channel 8B 24 Test Zone Figure 1 25 Tasks and Details tor Titan Frame Figure 1 25 is a hybrid of the first two examples in that it contains both icons and a table The three icons can be selected to open up specific editors tor the currently selected frame The table provides a list of the output channels associated with this frame Double clicking on the specific channel will open the editor tor that channel Win JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 1 Overview Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom border of the Navigator window and is divided into two sections The lett section of the status bar displays specific information about the currently selected device in the tree view Specifically tor items that have them it will display the Device ID and Device Type of the device The righ
12. The data under the Test column shows the most recent measurement taken at that point tor the trequency under which the value appears This measurement can be the result of a manual Full or Point test or of an automatic scheduled Full test This column will have a red background as with the Amp Output points in Figure 15 9 it it differs more than the contigured deviation trom the value in the Set column Question Marks in this column can indicate that the point was not tested usually because it has no valid set value during an automated test run or that the value measured was invalid in the noise floor Dev The data under the Dev column shows the deviation between the Test value and the Set value The deviation is calculated by subtracting the Set value from the Test value rather than being measured This column will have a red background as with the Amp Output points in Figure 15 9 if it is outside the configured allowable deviation for the point frequency and test under which the value is shown Question marks in this column occur whenever either the Set value or the Test value is not known Status Bar The Auto Tests window s Status Bar has six sections three text sections and three graphic sections These sections are described in the following list The left most text section displays information specifying the currently running test If no tests are currently running this section is blank This section also displays informat
13. Warning Status AIO Unit 2 Card Warning 243 Warning Status MTC Unit 1 244 Warning Status MTC Unit 2 245 Warning Status LVIO Unit 1 246 Warning Status LVIO Unit 2 Titan T9OxxDSP NDU 241 Warning Status AlO Unit 1 242 Warning Status AIO Unit 2 243 Warning Status AIO Unit 3 244 Warning Status AIO Unit 4 245 Warning Status MTC Unit 1 Wrong Mic Station Type Mic Station Number Windows 540 Fault 540 Frame Number SNMP Trap generated faults SNMP Trap Number 1 Fault Log Fault Service 2 Fault Log E mail Service 3 Fault Log Relay Service 34 Monitored Services 4 Fault Log SNMP Service 5 Fault Log Service Monitoring Service 6 10 Reserved for tuture Fault Log Services 11 255 Monitored Services eo IS Clone Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Type Name Chapter 16 System Supervision Fault Number Values 65 80 Mic Audible Fault for ACS Mic Station Number 1 Gateway Fault 2 596 Fault 3 DOS 540 Fault i e managed by Gateway 128 255 128 255 ACS Toolset Fault Report for ACS System 1 16 Monitor Point Audible 20K Test Fault ACS Systems with Legacy M T e g 596 s Monitor Point Test Fault Titan Systems Combine Fault Type and Fault Number into word then Bits 15 1 always High Bit Bits 14 O for Audible Test 1 for 20K Test Bits 13 11 ACS Number 0 7 for ACS 1 8 Bits 10 6 596 Frame Number 0 31 for Frames 1 32 Bits 5 4
14. Will TED Chapter 17 VisDIDSetup ta ovative electronic vests Definition id The index in the color list of this color lt color gt ie l val Blue Green Red Hexadecimal color representation of this color 284 Will TED uiiawoetvaveiserramivimestges 0G pile 17 Vis ID Setup MessageList xml This is the content specification tile tor VisDID Continuous It is generally located at c ied vis did The file can be edited with any text editor but the structure of the file must be maintained Sample File lt messagelist gt lt screen signid 1 zoneid 1 gt lt message id 1 format HT ML count 0 priority 6 holdtine 0 refreshrate 3 restart false gt http vernon prizmcm playcontent asp lt message gt lt screen gt lt messagelist gt Tag List The following is a list of all tags present in the MessageList xml tile with explanations and possible values for all elements and attributes The outline tree structure will mirror the tree structure ot the file Alltags lt gt need to have a matching closing tag lt gt or be closed themselves lt gt in a rigid tree structure i e lt x gt lt y gt some value lt y gt lt z gt some value lt z gt lt x gt Definition Value Root level node tor messagelist xml lt messagelist gt document signid Integer representing the sign ID zoneid Integer representing the zone ID Detines a single screen in the system l
15. e All sensors must be connected to the same input group on the collection unit e Allsensors must be located in the same loudspeaker zone Group 1 8 Jw 1 Gate CS 2 Noise Sensor 3 Noise Sensor 4 Gate C4 5 Noise Sensor 6 Noise Sensor 7 Noise Sensor 8 Noise Sensor Group 9 16 9 Moise Sensor P 10 Moise Sensor P 11 Noise Sensor P 12 Noise Sensor P 13 Noise Sensor P 14 Noise Sensor 15 Noise Sensor P 16 Noise Sensor Group 17 24 17 Noise Sensor 18 Noise Sensor 19 Noise Sensor 20 Noise Sensor 21 Noise Sensor P 22 Noise Sensor 23 Noise Sensor P 24 Noise Sensor Group 25 32 25 Noise Sensor 26 Noise Sensor P 27 Moise Sensor 28 Noise Sensor 29 Noise Sensor 30 Noise Sensor 31 Noise Sensor 32 Noise Sensor Print Descriptions Figure 2 15 Ambient Sensor Assignment Ambient Sensor Assignment 1 Click on theAssign Sensors button trom the Ambient Analysis Window The Ambient Sensor Assignment window will be displayed as shown in Figure 2 15 2 Select the appropriate ambient sensor collection unit trom the droplist box located at the top right portion of the window 3 Select the checkbox tor the sensor s that will control this channel Sensor inputs on collector units are sub divided into groups of eight 8 All sensors for a single channel must reside on the same collec
16. lt Delete cy Print Mic User ID Mic Station User Hardy Martin aa TE Hardy Martin us aC Hardy Martin ha yy wp co dl ci hp IED American Airlines United Airlines Fire Department LS Sirways Air Canada T CAS Hawaiian Airlines Mesa Airlines Island Air Continental Airlines Delta Air Lines China Air America West 36 Records A Figure 5 15 Mic Station Users Viewer Add Click the Add button to open the Mic Station Editor with a blank form as shown in Figure 5 16 Alternatively double clicking on a user in the viewer will also open the editor Wim JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 5 Mic Station Security Mic Station User Username User Groupisi All Call O 2 All Call Emergency Groups Companies 3 American Airlines CI 4 Delta 4ir Lines Groups Companies Ol 5 United Airlines American Airlines we O 6 US Airways Delta Connection Passcode O 8 Southwest Airlines 9 Hawaiian Airlines C 10 Go User Language O 11 Fas fo English 12 Island Air Ol 13 Continental Airlines Graphic Permission 14 Alaska Airlines Ol 15 Oroni Air International 114 E hexadecimal o Maorkhmesk Airlines Figure 5 16 Mic Station User Editor Add New The Mic Station User Editor has several configuration options as described below Username The name for this user Groups Companies Radio buttons used to indicate if this
17. 29 Will TED Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Innovative Electronic Designs 30 buttons on the right of the box Release This value determines the rate at which the output level will decrease when a decrease in the ambient sensor level has been received The value is in the number of seconds and can be directly entered in the box using the keyboard or adjusted using the arrow buttons on the right of the box Presets e Fast Preset where the attack time is 1 second and the release time is 2 seconds e Medium Preset where the attack time is 3 seconds and the release time is 4 seconds Slow Preset where the attack time is 7 seconds and the release time is 10 seconds Limit The limit sets the maximum amount of gain that can be applied through the ambient analysis compensation process The amount of gain available is determined by the attenuator setting of the Channel Out slider For example if the channel out slider is set to 20dB as shown in Figure 2 11 then the maximum available setting for the Limit slider will be 20dB Setting the Limit to 12dB will cause the output level to be increased by a maximum of 12dB above the setting of the Channel Out slider Thus with very loud ambient noise levels the output level will be effectively set to 8dB and reduced to 20dB when the ambient noise level is very low or has dropped below the threshold The ambient noise compensation will be continually adjusted within this ra
18. 596 Series Test Configuration innate Electronic ve stone Monitor Zone Double click the Monitor Zone icon to open the ACS Circuit Test window This feature is used to monitor the point in real time and execute a test or set on an individual circuit A zone is selected from the drop down list and then all points available for that zone are displayed in the monitor point list Selecting a point in the list will immediately switch the monitoring to that point a 20 Volume s z1 American Airlines Gate E5 x Single Circuit 10 Set Test ACS Circuit Test American Airlines Gate E5 oO Slot 14 ut 20 alizer Output qu 540 Output Slot 10 Input 1 Amplifier Circuit Amp 1 Speaker Circuit Spk LF E Set Level 49dBu 20K Set Level Start Close 30 Figure 14 7 ACS Circuit Test Window Volume Click the up or down arrows to adjust the volume of the monitor output This is an output physically located on the 590A card and is used to drive a powered speaker that is usually the speaker located in the rack mount microphone station Level This meter displays the current signal level for the selected monitor zone Zone droplist This is a list of zones in the system that are available for monitoring Select a zone from this list first and a list of available monitor points for that zone is displayed in the point selection list located in the middle of the window Single
19. Chapter 6 528 Interface Designer Innovative Electronic Designs Announcement Controller Template Storage Each announcement controller retains the template tiles tor mic stations so that the correct template is loaded whenever the mic station reboots with tactory detault objects This also applies to replacing a damaged mic station with a new one when it is contigured with the same IP address group number and mic number To ensure that this will function correctly the templates must be transterred to the announcement controller Transfer Templates to Announcement Controller 1 Open the Actions menu and select the Update Database and Devices item This will open the bulk update window as shown in Figure 6 19 The lower window lists the announcement controllers available in the system 2 Check the box next to the announcement controller to receive the templates 3 Click the Update ACS button to begin the transter 106 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Default Text Table Data Chapter 6 528 Interface Designer In each mic station there are certain text elements that do not change when a template is downloaded This consists of generic text that is the same across all templates These elements are things such as the previous and next button labels and the Enter Zone Code prompt that appears when entering a zone group This text can be changed to alternative wording or other languages it necessary To edit this text select the
20. It is important that this EPROM version number matches the EPROM version number installed in the mic station to ensure proper operation 66 Win JED Innovative Electremte Destans Chapter 4 Microphone Station Setup Permission amp User Settings Tab Enterprise provides a great deal of control over the tunctions available at each mic station When a mic station is contigured with the Lock Mic Station box unchecked users are not required to log into the station in order to use it When a station not password protected its permissions are determined by the Permissions amp User Settings tab When station is locked then the permissions are determined by the configuration of the user in the Mic Station Users setup section When functioning in an unlocked state a mic station is assigned to belong to one or more User Groups This setting determines the announcement functions available at this mic station xf General Permissions amp User Settings Groups Companies amp Gates Key amp Button Assignements Sidekick f_4 d User Language Graphic Permission oxo0000000 hexadecimal User Groups W 1 All Call 2 All Call Emergency C 3 American Airlines 4 Delta Air Lines 15 United Airlines 6 US Airways 7 Delta Connection 8 Southwest Airlines _ 9 Hawaiian Airlines 10 GO CJ 11 FAS 12 Island Air C 13 Continental Airlines C 14 Alaska Airlines 15 Omni Air Internation
21. Mic Station Security Enterprise has various mechanisms for restricting user access to microphone stations and teatures of the announcement controller Access to features is managed via User Groups which are then assigned to microphone stations users and to specitic system features such as specitic pre recorded messages and zone groups A microphone station can only access those teatures that it is allowed Permissions can be fixed for the mic station or vary based on the user that is currently logged into the station Groups are always Airlines and used for the Flight Announcement System FAS Companies are other users such as a contractor consultant tire department security etc This section covers three areas related to mic station security SCONES ah Beppe ncaa be see cleat is atl teat heb aliens bala tet at 76 GOMPON ES 2505 6 ste ck eeout ihe caecarensdacches E mike 80 IAI STOH Ol User fot hoot ete etapa tees sac hanen eee cae taken OANE 84 5 Will TED Chapter 5 Mic Station Security Innovative Electronic Designs User Groups User Groups add a level of security to various aspects of the IED System by limiting access to zone groups PDRPs and many other features Configuring zone groups mic station users etc requires selecting one or more User Groups trom the user group list boxes in their respective editor forms For example a mic station user setup with only the American Airlines user group will not be able to page to a zo
22. Select From 3494 t To e211 t volume p t y bo ial Figure 11 31 Toolbar Hef Level 4 30 t dE The following options are available from the toolbar Please refer to appropriate titles under the File Menu for additional details on many of these features New File This option creates a new blank audio take with a length of one second I D Open File This option opens a dialog window to load take file from a local drive Clicking on the eo down arrow next to the icon opens a drop down menu with options to Open File and Open File From ACS Save This option saves the changes made to an opened file Save All This option saves changes made to all opened files Files that already have a filename will be saved automatically and those that are labeled untitled will be prompted for filenames using a standard Windows Save as dialog box Note This option is not available from the menu bar Play Selected This option plays the audio of the selected region Clicking on the down arrow O oo next to the icon opens a drop down menu with options to Play Selected and Play All Pause Resume This option pauses playback if playing or resumes the playback if paused of the take Stop This option stops playback of the take 181 Will TED Chapter II DRP Editor tative ete ctrnte Destane Record from ACS Mic Station This option activates the mic station to record the take audio R
23. The Load Channel Settings dialog box will appear Navigate to the desired file location in the Look In droplist box Click on the file containing the curve settings Click the Open button to load the settings 35 Wim TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Load Channel Settings 14 9 Gate C4 Look in Desktop G m My Documents 4 My Computer My Recent My Network Places Documents IFDMET ia Junk Channel Settings 14 9 Gate C4 xml Desktop ExportedS28MicTemplate xml French xml Training Room IPAU 10 2 151 125 Settings xml My Documents Fr My Computer kly Hetwork File name Channel Settings 14 9 Gate Ce Places Files of type XML files sml Cancel we Figure 2 22 Load Channel Settings 36 min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Channel Settings Menu Reference This section provides descriptions of the functions available in the menus on the Channel Settings window File Menu Edit Monitor Hel Logout Fe Load Ctrl L LJ Save s Ctr 5 Print Ctrl P Close F10 Figure 2 23 File Menu Login Logout This option is context sensitive and will change from Login to Logout based on which option is actually available If currently logged into the system then Logout will be the available option If not currently logged into the system then Login will be available
24. a complete system wide test will automatically run at the time entered in the Time box 24 hour clock format Uncheck the box to disable the automatic system test This test should be scheduled at a time when the system use is minimal and the facility is mostly unoccupied by the public 20K Test When the box is checked a 20kHz test will be pertormed at the specitied time interval in minutes This test is inaudible and will not impact system operation 231 596 Series Test Contiguration This page has been intentionally left blank 232 Titan Series Auto Test Configuration Titan series amplitier trames T9160 are equipped with automatic test functionality to allow each trame to monitor its own health as well as that of attached speaker circuits Any suspected faults are reported to IED s Fault Logger application This functionality is configured trom the Auto Tests window in Enterprise Auto Tests Window _ 2 cece ccc cece cece cece cece cece ecccccceeeeee 234 FV TMI E EEL LL E ce easy Sette soe cleat alc eye A AEE EE 236 Mentana Tool Bars Soe ee teeta a Cr cee nia itis ine eta ie OOS Sc Ses 236 AO a R oh soa ems oo nO YOO ae AD TR 237 Test Results Grid 0 ccc ccc cee ccc cc aoaaa aoaaa ana 238 AUSB artane ares So es Sted a Hane apheresis Soe eds Ree LS 240 Point Selection Window 2c hee clodceewaele cee cediecds edgGeeue coh eotwadercant 242 Auto Test Configuration Window isc cnc s even ee a eee 244 Oy
25. only the default Periodic Test is detailed in the list below Periodic Test or other test name Full Test Run a test all frequencies for all points in the test This option requires the current user to have the Run Tests permission under Titan DLL in IED s Password Manger Single Point Test Run a test all frequencies tor a single test point This option opens the Point Selection window shown below This option requires the current user to have the Run Tests permission under Titan DLL in IED s Password Manger Test Tone Play a tone on a single test point The tone expires atter several minutes or may be stopped with the Stop Current Test menu item This option opens the Point Selection window shown below Both the point and the frequency of the tone may be selected on this window This option requires the current user to have the Run Tests permission under Titan DLL in IED s Password Manger Full Set Pertorm a set all tones tor all points in the test This option requires the current user to have the Set Levels permission under Titan DLL in IED s Password Manger Single Point Set Pertorm a set all tones tor a single test point This option opens the Point Selection window shown below This option requires the current user to have the Set Levels permission under Titan DLL in IED s Password Manger Stop Current Test Stops any tests which are currently running in the frame This item is most useful to turn off
26. saves test results for the selected test Save OK Results When checked the frame saves test results for points which are set properly and which pass the test If not checked these results are not saved and therefore are not displayed in the Auto Tests window Save Fault Results When checked the frame saves test results for points which are set properly and which fail the test If not checked these results are not saved and therefore are not displayed in the Auto Tests window Save Unknown Results When checked the frame saves test results for points which do not test properly this is a rare condition If not checked these results are not saved and therefore are not displayed in the Auto Tests window Save Set Results When checked the frame saves sets as results If not checked sets are not saved as results Note that set values are always saved but if they are not saved as results the set run will not appear in the Auto Tests window However the Auto Tests window overrides this setting so min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto Test Contiguration that all sets performed are saved as results Schedules for selected Sequences The edit controls in the Schedules tor selected Sequence group box allow tor contiguring the test sequence selected in the Test Sequences list box to be run automatically at detined times It necessary the same test can be run with multiple schedules The edit cont
27. see Figure 16 8 Trip the relay when there is any fault on a selected device or devices For example to trigger a relay tor any Titan amp trame one would select those devices in the device list that appears as in Figure 16 9 Ibe Relays Amplifier Fou lad e Relsy is triggered by fault conditions Mic Station Fault Description Titan Amplifier Fault any System Fault Activation Solid Latch Titan Amplifier Fault Reverse polarity Le Active Low Inactive High ary System Fault Trigger Faults from Selected Devices T Titan Amplifier Fault nai ri Les dks fen a d e Linassigned S90 Server 574 oar ACS SLOCPU 573 ae Crestron CPU 581 Unassigned Gateway Computer 580 C TEST 568 Unasigned C Test NLR Frame 3583 Linsesigned ha Teen 1 Ses fe Titan 2 588 Unassigned fe Titan PAU T9160 S87 Liri zik 5 bee e Universal Power Supply 534 Unassigned J Uncheck all Invert Salaction Figure 16 8 Sample Faults From Selected Devices View Titan Amps e Custom Trigger Advanced Setup see Figure 16 9 Figure 16 10 and Figure 16 11 Trip the relay based on any permutation and combination of device fault type and fault number This is an advanced option that requires some knowledge of the internal fault numbering system and so may require information trom the IED to complete But this option will allow setups like a relay tor any mic station co
28. when the audio play method is setup in the Contiguration window to play takes by downloading to the ACS Record from ACS Mic Station This option activates the designated mic station to record a take Once selected the mic station will start beeping indicating that it is ready Additionally the status bar at the bottom of the main window will show Ready To Go Active as shown in Figure 1 27 indicating that the user can start recording by pressing the mic switch or Annc O button on the mic station iz Ready To So Active Figure 11 27 Mic Station Status The record operation times out if the user does not activate the mic station within a tew seconds The status bar at the bottom will inform the user with an appropriate message if no audio was detected by the ACS On successtul recording the sottware will automatically retrieve and display the recorded Take Retrieve DAX List from ACS Click this option to open the Take List window This window is used to list all takes that are currently on the ACS The ACS can have several thousand individual takes spanning across multiple languages Because of this retrieving and listing all takes is time consuming The user can narrow down the range and language ot the take list by entering appropriate values in the Start Stop and Language controls Click the Retrieve List button to populate the Available Takes on the ACS list box with take numbers that reside on the ACS Note that this does not re
29. 10 Takes Viewer Double click the Takes icon shown in Figure 10 1 to open the Viewer Figure 10 2 This window provides a list of all takes programmed in the selected announcement controller This window provides access to edit or delete existing takes as well as add new ones A filter can be applied to simplify the list and make it easier to view a specific group of data add edt lt Delete f Fiter Z Print Takes Take Number Description Le United Airlines Airline J 1002 American Airlines Airline J 1003 Delta Air Lines Airline J 1004 US Airways Airline 1 1005 British Airways Airline J 1006 Canadian Airlines Airline 1 1007 Lufthansa Airline J 1008 KLM Royal Dutch Airlines Airline J 1009 TWA Airline J i010 Continental Airlines Airline J 1011 Northwest Airlines Airline J 1012 Southwest Airlines Airline J 1013 Department of National Defense Airline J 1014 Alitalia Airline zi OK 556 Record s A Figure 10 2 Takes Viewer Double click any take in the list to open the Editor window for that take add 3 edit X Delete Fiter 5 Print zone Location Type Cutout To Device d card D Card Zone Lj2 d card D Card Zone LJ 3 d card D Card Zone l4 d card D Card Zone 5 d card D Card Zone EE d card D Card Zone Lj d card D Card Zone Js d card D Card Zone J J titan Titan Digital BigReg Titan 10 titan Titan Digital BigReg
30. 2 untitledz Figure 11 9 File Tabs Open File Select this option to open a take tile trom the local computer hard drive mapped network drive or portable media This will open a standard Windows Open dialog window to allow selecting the file Note Only WAV tiles of specific formats supported by the DRP Editor will be properly displayed 16 kHz 16 bit mono The length of the file and the positions of the left and right selection cursors are displayed on the status bar at the bottom of the application window By detault the lett and right cursors are set to the beginning and end of the tile when opened Figure 11 10 shows the total length of the audio file is 40 61 seconds with the lett and right cursors abbreviated by letters Land R at O and 40 61 seconds respectively 167 Wia TED Chapter 11 DRP Editor TT oee erene pests 168 l T r p r ey r E untitledi E untitled2 E C tempi Chappel wav es Cribempiai i way Detail view Not logged in Total 40 615 L 0 00s R 40 615 Figure 11 10 Take Detail View Open File From ACS Select this option to retrieve a take trom the ACS Selecting this option produces the window shown in Figure 11 11 Select the appropriate take language and take filename then click Open to retrieve the tile trom the ACS The status bar at the bottom of the main window will indicate any errors that may have occurred Click the Cancel button to close the win
31. 4 0 of the 528 Interface Designer 89 Chapter 6 528 Interface Designer Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Launching the 528 Interface Designer 90 The 528 Interface Designer is a separate application from the main Enterprise application Therefore it is not launched from an icon or menu located within the Enterprise Navigator window The icon for launching the 528 Interface Designer is typically located on the IED Application Bar as shown in Figure 6 2 On some legacy systems it may have been installed at a later time and is available as a shortcut icon on the desktop Pa Figure 6 1 528 Interface Designer Icon Figure 6 2 Application Bar From the application bar click the 528 Interface Designer icon to launch the application To launch from the desktop double click on the desktop icon The main application window will appear as shown in Figure 6 3 From here existing templates can be modified or new templates created and subsequently downloaded to one or more 528 series mic stations in the system a ud L New Open Save Delete SendTo Show Preview Add Delete Move Move Add Delete Template Template Template Template Mics Window Button Button Button Up Button Do Scroll Box Scroll Box Template Name IED Training Room Enable Keypad Iv Enter Gate Number Button Width 110 Next Departure Arival Message Button Default BackgroundColor v Pause Sequence Repeat Last Departure Button Default Text
32. 4 13 Sidekick Properties Tab Expansion Ports This specifies the type of expansion station 0 none 1 FME or 2 Sidekick for each port Click the text in the Device column to open a droplist box and select the appropriate type Double clicking the device field allows the device number to be typed in Sidekick Button Assignments This table assigns the entry codes to the buttons and functions identically to the Mic Buttons Assignments table on the Key amp Button Assignments tab The mic switch PTT on the expansion stations will always use the same zone group assignment as that assigned to the owner 528 series station Note The same button assignments are applied to all Sidekicks attached to the 528 mic station Additional Properties Tab This tab is used for custom mis station configuration and is rarely used This tab should not be edited unless directed to do so by IED Technical Support When using the 528 Interface Designer the IP Address and Mic Template ID will appear in the window once the mic station has been discovered ko Will TED Chapter 4 Microphone Station Setup ti nvative Electronic vests Mic Station Editor x Groups Companies amp Gates Key amp Button Assignements Sidekick Properties Additional Properties al gt _ Add Property _ Edit Selected X Delete Selected L IPAddress 102131132 L MicTemplateId 1 4 Previous gt Next Figure 4 14 Additional Properties Tab 74
33. ANNC button on mic stations with a gooseneck microphone Mic Button Assignments This teature is available tor 500 and 520 series mic stations that have tixed button assignments instead of a keypad The 500 series mic stations have four 4 buttons and the 520 series stations have eight 8 buttons in addition to the mic switch or ANNC button Zone group entry codes are assigned to each button in the Mic Button Assignments table as shown in Figure 4 11 iil JED Innovative Etectremte Destans Chapter 4 Microphone Station Setup e Key This represents the button number on the mic station This field cannot be edited e Button Assignment This is the zone group entry code PDRP entry code or combined zone group entry code that will be activated when the button is pressed Double click to open a droplist box and select the appropriate entry code e PDRP Zonemap Override This is the zone group to use for the PDRP message when triggered trom the mic station It the value is set to 0 NONE then it will use the default zones defined tor that PDRP message Mic Station Editor x General Permissions amp User Settings Groups Companies amp Gates Key amp Button Assignements Sidekick f_4 gt Combined Zone Groups Combined Zone Group LA 1 502 Gate E2 2 501 Gate E1 d3 503 Baggage Claim Area 5 504 Ticketing Area Mic Switch Code Gombined Zone Group Entry Godes fi Entry 1 11000 Mic Button Assi
34. Auto Tests window The following list details this functionality File Login Logout Opens the login window or causes the currently logged in user to be logged out This functionality is also available by pressing F2 Print Opens IED Print Manager See the section of this document on Enterprise Printing tor information on IED Print Manager This functionality is also available by holding down lt Ctrl gt and pressing P Close Closes the Auto Tests window This functionality is also available by pressing F10 Edit Auto Test Configuration Opens the Auto Test Configuration window This option requires the current user to have the Contigure Tests permission under Titan DLL in IED s Password Manger View Refresh Refreshes the test results shown in the Test Results Grid Auto Refresh When this item is checked the Test Results Grid automatically retreshes the test results and other data whenever a test completes regardless of whether the test was started automatically or manually 236 iin JED Innovative Electronic Besigne Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto Test Configuration Help About Displays the About window Run Tests The Run Tests menu is only available trom the tool bar or as a pop up menu by right clicking in the Test Results Grid This menu provides a sub menu for each defined test which in turn provides menu items to initiate sets and tests Since all of these sub menus are identical except for which test is run
35. Card Zone An analog audio zone on an ACS 500D card e Titan Digital Audio Zone Typically a digital audio zone on a Titan frame such as a T9160 but may also apply to relay or logic zones on other Titan hardware e Sign Zone A display used for visual paging e 8000 Zone Azone or zonemap on a slaved 8000 Series system e Multi ACS Analog Audio An analog audio tie line zone between two ACS s for multi ACS announcements e Multi ACS Analog Data A control zone between two ACS s for multi ACS announcements e Multi ACS Digital Audio Zone A digital audio tie line zone between two ACS s These are physically implemented via CobraNet audio between 510N cards Location The logical name of this zone specific to the user selection is typed into the edit box This is a description to aid the user when placing this zone into zone groups Enable this Zone This option makes the zone active when checked Zones can be left disabled unchecked when programming the system for future expansion Zone Number s This is the unique identification number for this zone When adding new zones a range of numbers can be entered and the software will automatically create all the individual zones using the same general data Atterwards each zone must be edited to enter the location and other properties When editing an existing zone only a single zone number can be entered in this tield to allow changing the zone number Zone Type Specific Tab Zon
36. Circuit radio button This selects the function that will be performed when the Start button is pressed Choose Set to run an individual circuit set for the selected point Choose Test to run an individual circuit test for the selected point Monitor Point list This list is located in the middle of the window and is populated with a list of points assigned to the zone selected from the zone drop down list Click on a point to monitor the point This is also the point that will be tested or set when the Start button is pressed 222 iin JED innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 14 596 Series Test Configuration Result Label The result of the test or set is displayed below the Monitor Point list The set level and deviation are displayed tor a point atter a test or set has been executed for that point Start Click this button to start a circuit set or test The function executed is based on the selection made in the Single Circuit radio button group Close Click this button to close the window 223 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 14 596 Series Test Configuration Monitor Mics Double click the Monitor Mics icon to open the ACS Mic Station Test window This feature is used to monitor a mic station in real time and execute a test or set on an individual mic station A mic station is selected trom the drop down list ACS Mic Station Test a 20 Volume vr ft Legacy Rack Mount
37. ETT Glib bl do do g g 5 7 9 15 Backup 4mp Mode auto Backup mp Normally OFF Default Figure 3 5 Zone Atten amp Backup Tab The controls on this tab are as follows CAI k c load Data Click this button to retrieve the data from the frame necessary to populate all fields on this tab C send Data Click this button to send the data on the tab to the frame GZA Bk Amp Enable Backup Amplifier Enable This setting is made for each amplifier card in the system When checked the system will switch this amplifier card to the backup amplifier in the event that the card fails When left unchecked that card will be excluded from the backup amplifier switching process Ga Chan Attenuation This is the setting of the output attenuator in the DSP that controls the signal level at the input of the amplitier channel The value entered must be in negative dB values that represent the 99 Will TED Chapter 3 Titan IPAU Config Tool annie tectonic Pesians amount of attenuation required e g 15 to apply 15dB of attenuation to the output signal The maximum value is OdB which represents unity gain trom the output of the DSP to the input of the amplifier CGAL Disable All Enable All The function of this button toggles with each press When it displays Disable All clicking it will uncheck all checkboxes in the Backup Amp Enable section When it displays Enable A
38. Electronic Designs Zone Editor Adding a new zone or editing an existing zone will open the Zone Editor window Zone Editor General Tab on page 126 shows the Zone Editor for an existing zone There are three tabs on this window General Zone Type Specific and Additional Properties Zone Editor General Zone Type Specific Additional Properties Owned By ACS S10CPU Location fa card J Enable this zone fone Murmberts 1 q Previous b Next OK Cancel Figure 8 9 Zone Editor General Tab Details tor the contiguration options available on each tab are detined below For step by step instructions on adding editing or deleting zones reter to the previous section There are two buttons located along the bottom of the window that are common to all tabs OK Click the OK button to save changes and close the window Cancel Click the Cancel button to discard any changes and close the window General Tab The General tab is shown in Zone Editor General Tab on page 126 Settings tor zones must be made on this tab first The options available on the Zone Type Specific tab are dependant on the Type setting on this tab Owned By This tield displays the parent announcement controller that controls this zone This tield is read only Type This droplist box sets the zone type The current choices for types are 126 min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 8 Zone Setup e D
39. Electronic veston 00 Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto Test Configuration Waveform This droplist box provides the ability to change the test tone trom a Sine Wave to a constant DC voltage Under most circumstances the Waveform should be a Sine Wave External Signal Source In rare cases it might be necessary to use an externally sourced test signal rather than allowing the trame to generate its own test tone In cases where this is necessary the External Signal Source checkbox must be checked for all signal settings relying on the external source s When this checkbox is checked the Wavetorm and Frequency cannot be edited Default Deviation Threshold These two spin edits control the detault values used for the positive and negative deviation thresholds when a point is tirst selected tor testing on the Auto Test Contiguration Window The spin edit labeled changes the detault positive deviation threshold and the spin edit labeled changes the default negative deviation threshold Advanced Options The Advanced Options group box contains parameters which should only be moditied by qualitied personnel Consequently these edit controls are not visible unless the current user has the Contigure Adv Test Params permission under Titan DLL in IED s Password Manger Each ot these settings is detailed in the tollowing list Setup Time This spin edit controls the amount of time the system waits at the beginning of a test to a
40. External Test Results This tab displays the results for test points that are not contigured as an ACS Output device type The columns for the grid as shown in Figure 14 5 are identical in function to those on the ACS Output Test Results tab xj ACS Output Test Results External Test Results Mic Test Results Audible Test 20K Test sejra Wane OOO e Dev Selev Dev 1 B1 American Airlines Gate E5 Slot 14 19 0 16 0 1 B2 United Airlines Gate E6 Slot 1B 19 0 16 0 1 B3 Baggage Claim Area Slot 1C 19 0 16 0 1 B4 Ticketing Area Slot 1D 19 0 16 0 1 B5 Upper Curbside Slot 34 19 0 16 0 1 B6 Lower Curbside Slot 3B 19 0 16 0 1 B7 Security Checkpoint Slot 3C 19 0 16 0 1 BS Concourse A Slot 3D 19 0 16 0 1 C1 American Airlines Gate E5 Slot 10 Input 1 21 0 18 0 1 C2 United Airlines Gate E6 Slot 10 Input 2 21 0 18 0 1 C3 Baggage Claim Area Slot 10 Input 3 20 0 18 0 1 C4 Ticketing Area Slot 10 Input 4 21 0 18 0 1 C5 Upper Curbside Slot 11 Input 1 21 0 18 0 1 C6 Lower Curbside Slot 11 Input 2 20 0 18 0 1 C7 Security Checkpoint Slot 11 Input 3 21 0 18 0 1 C8 Concourse Slot 11 Input 4 21 0 18 0 1 D1 American Airlines Gate E5 Amp 1 4 0 7 0 i M Display Faults Only Close Figure 14 5 External Test Results Tab 219 Will TED Chapter 14 596 Series Test Configuration tnnevative tleetromte pesters Mic Test Results Analog microphone stations have a built in 500Hz oscillator
41. Innovative Electronic Designs e Yes to All Save current and all subsequent changes while navigating the Previous and Next buttons and do not prompt any more X Data has changed Do you want to sawe current data before moving to another one I a Mo ves to all Figure 5 12 Edit Contirmation Dialog Box Edit a Company The steps necessary to edit an existing Company are as follows Highlight a company in the Company Viewer window Click the Edit button located on the toolbar Make necessary changes to the data on the form eS Click on the OK button to save and return to the Company Viewer Note The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to discard changes and return to the viewer form Delete Click the Delete button to remove the currently selected company trom the system The user is prompted for confirmation Figure 5 13 before the selected record is erased In addition to erasing one record at a time multiple records can be selected at once Simply select multiple Companies by holding down the CTRL key and clicking on multiple records in the viewer and click on the Delete button trom the toolbar CI x Are you sure you want to delete selected recordist I j i No Cancel Figure 5 13 Delete Confirmation Dialog Box Delete a Company The steps necessary to delete an existing Company are as follows 1 Highlight a company in the Company Viewer window or select mult
42. Make the necessary changes to the data on the form oe E Click the OK button to save the changes and close the window Note The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to discard changes and return to the viewer form 113 Will TED Chapter Zone Group Setup Innovative Electronic Designs Delete Click the Delete button to remove the selected zone group trom the system The user is prompted for confirmation See h 1 SectionTitle on page 114 before the selected record is erased In addition to erasing one record at a time multiple zone groups can be selected at once Select multiple zone groups by holding down the CTRL key while clicking on the records Click the Delete button atter all selections have been made x Are you sure you want to delete selected records 7 No Cancel 4 Figure 7 7 Delete Contirmation Dialog Box Delete a Zone Group 1 Click on the Zone Groups icon trom the Enterprise Navigator window to open the Zone Group Viewer 2 Highlight a zone group in the Zone Group Viewer window or select multiple zone groups by holding down the CTRL key while clicking 3 Click the Delete button located on the toolbar 4 Click the Yes button to delete the selected group s Note The Cancel or No buttons can be clicked at any time to cancel the delete operation and return to the viewer form Filter Click the Filter button to open a drop down menu of available zone group
43. Ol etree pak God a a tepe E et ial ett be Soot fed aetna Gan TEA hice ak Gace 245 Menu lool Bars ek ois ordi Ne Cee Biot Uh athe ae ute hap theese ls hee 245 Point Selection Grid oaaao aoaaa oaaao ccc ccc cece cece cc ccceeeeeneee 246 SHS BOr aaue a Ae oe apn a a a a a 249 Edit Test Signals Window 2s sigue eset eee dee ee ees 25 EE ven sic eae meta eam ae a Ee eee CO eet tw eee eee Re SPR OIE Ce A 251 Edit Test Schedules Window o oo oaoa aoaaa aaoo oaaao oaa 255 IE EAE E AE EE E EE E E A AEE 255 TESt SEQUENCES posia aeaa eaa e OSEA 256 Schedules for selected Sequences 2 e ee eee eeeeeereeeee 257 Edit Test Points Window olll ccc cece LLL LLL L LLL LLL LL LaaLa 259 EEE UG EEE E E E E A E A E EEE 259 Points list box Add Point button and Del Point button 259 Circuit Dota olaola ob bk creases duet eddy ati bs LLL LLL LLL eAuliv boat d 260 Collecior Unni veo sk ss Seed hid ins ad ted oe Mego Biss 260 Reset Points OK and Cancel Burlo nsec 2 teedoveceheonteled 0 Soe 261 POUR VV INO OW 3 ai Sochlrcesprt 20 Shane Rahat 2 belt alee eats O55 Monte ge Danae Bey teeta A 262 233 Will TED Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto Test Configuration _tnevative electronic pestons Auto Tests Window To access the Auto Test functionality open the Auto Tests window by first selecting a frame in Enterprise s lett hand pane then double clicking the Test icon eg TED Enterprise Application Edit Tools Help BigRe
44. Point Selection window 242 mint JED Innovative Electronic Besigne 00 Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto Test Configuration Cancel button Close the window without taking any other action The test shown at the top menu is not run 243 Will TED Caption a Auto Test Configuration Window 244 The Auto Test Contiguration window see Figure 15 5 opens when the Auto Test Contiguration menu item or toolbar button This window provides the ability to add or remove points trom a test s contiguration to set the positive and negative deviation thresholds tor each point and to access configuration windows for signal settings test schedules and point definitions Note Unlike the Auto Tests window and most other windows used to configure Titan frames the changes made on this window are not live edits and do not take effect until the changes are saved via the File Close menu or the OK button Auto Test Configuration BigReg Amp Frame 40 81 31 11 19072 l z ioj xi titan zone 9 Chan 14 Ambient Out Chan 14 4mp Input Chan 14 Amp Output Chan 14 Speaker Current titan zone 10 Chan 16 Ambient Out Chan 1B Amp Input Chan 1B Amp Output Chan 1B Speaker Current titan zone 11 Chan 24 Ambient Out Chan 24 Amp Input Chan 24 Amp Output Chan 24 Speaker Current titan zone 12 Chan 26 Ambient Out lt lt OT TT AE AER A Cy C1 Ce A Cy AA Cy A 6 0 Figure 15 5 Auto Test Contiguration
45. Points column of the row in which the value appears Additionally the values shown are measured as the frequency under which they are shown is generated through the channel If a point is not configured for testing under a given frequency all three columns will show a blue dash rather than a value Likewise in the case where a point is contigured as part of the test but the value is unknown for some reason three question marks 2 are displayed rather than a value The following list discusses each of these three columns in detail Set The data under the Set column header represents the value for this intersection of frequency and point to which all test measurements for the same intersection of frequency and point are compared In other words this value is the recorded measurement under normal operating conditions This value is referred to as a Set Value and is generated when a Full or Point Set is performed trom the Run Tests menu and then re used for tests until another Set is performed A yellow background and or question marks instead of a value in the Set column as shown for the Speaker Current points in Figure 15 9 indicates that a valid set value has not been recorded for this point frequency test This could indicate that a Set has never been performed or that there is an issue at that point For Current points this usually indicates that the load on the amplitier is not signiticant enough for a valid measurement Test
46. Room IPAU 605 Channel Settings int Titan Frame Settings Logged In Hardy Martin Close Training Room IPAU 605 Figure 2 24 Print Manager Selecting this option will close the Channel Settings window Edit Menu Undo All Changes t Monitor Help l Ertz Undo All henges tritate EAA L Copy All By Paste Al Inputs and Zone Manager Parametric Equalizer Ambient Analysis Figure 2 25 Edit Menu This option will undo all changes that have been made since the current channel was selected atter opening the Channel Settings window This option will be grayed out when unavailable It is important to remember that this command is only available to undo changes made for the current channel Switching to another channel while the window is open will reset this option min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Copy All This command will copy all the current channel settings to the clipboard It allows channel settings to be easily copied to one or more other channels Paste All This command is only available if channel setting data has been placed on the clipboard using the Copy All command This will cause the channel settings stored in the clipboard to be applied to the currently selected channel Inputs and Zone Manager This command will change the window to display the Inputs and Zone Manager contiguration options Parametric Equalizer Thi
47. Room Titan ACS Sar Th ada OF eee Edit 4 Previous b Next Play OK Cancel Figure 9 13 PDRP Editor Schedule Entry Use The Following Schedule s Originating From Check this box to enable time triggered playback for this message Turning this on will enable all schedule entries Uncheck the box to stop scheduled playback The droplist box to the right selects the announcement controller that will actually play the message if more than one exists in the system 140 iin JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter Q PDRP Messages Add Click the Add button to create a new schedule This will open the Add Edit Schedule window as shown in Figure 9 14 Edit Click the Edit button to open the Add Edit Schedule window for the highlighted schedule entry Delete Click the Delete button to remove the highlighted schedule from the system Caution This delete action is immediate and will not result in any additional confirmation prompts If a schedule is accidentally deleted click the Cancel button to exit the PDRP Editor without saving changes The schedule will not be removed from the system Add Edit Schedule Start Time ays of the w 6 01 lv Monday W Tuesday Minutes Between Plays I Wednesday f M Thursday Use restricted dates Iv Friday Start Date W Saturday stop Date 11 11 Figure 9 14 Add Edit Schedule Pop up Dialog Box Schedule Editor
48. Test Tones before they expire This option requires the current user to have the Run Tests permission under Titan DLL in IED s Password Manger Zo Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto Test Configuration Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Test Results Grid 238 The Test Results Grid provides detail regarding the most recent results trom each of the frame s Auto Tests Each row of the grid provides information for a specific test point while each column provides information for a specific result value Chan 14 Ambient Out titan zone 9 Chan 14 Amp Input z m z Chan 14 Amp Output 10 2 10 2 EE 215 215 0 0 Chan 14 Speaker Current 955 23 1 777 1 4 777 77 Baa ere titan zone 10 15 Chan 1B Ambient Out 7 z z 16 Chan 16 Amp Input p z z 7 JE 17 Chan 16 Amp Output 10 2 10 2 EES 214 214 0 0 18 Chan 1B Speaker Current 9 24 0 72 22 7 727 gee 77 72 titan Fana 11 7275 2 Chan 72A Amhiont ri it Oo J mm A Figure 15 3 Test Results Grid The top of the Test Results Grid s contains header rows which have white text on a blue background that tades trom dark to light Header rows do not move when the grid is scrolled Before discussing the meaning of the text in the header rows it is first necessary to understand the non header rows in the grid Each of these non header rows represents a specitic location or test point in a channel s s
49. Tree View Provides a hierarchal view of the system and all of its components Tasks and Details Provides information for the currently selected item in the tree view and or access to launch additional setup windows for the item Status Bar Provides information on the selected item in the tree view and login status Will TED Chapter l Overview Innovative Electronic Designs Login Logout The software is password protected and users are required to log into the application in order to make any changes to the system Adding new users deleting users or managing permissions are performed using the Password Manager Contig utility that can be accessed trom the Tools menu A shortcut key for this feature is available by using the F2 key Pressing this key will immediately logout the current user If no one is logged in pressing the key will open the Login window Login A user can login by selecting Login from the Application menu by clicking the Login button located on the toolbar or by pressing the F2 key A TED Enterprise i oals Help a B x e Figure 1 4 Login Button Edit Tools Bain FZ s Reload Data FS T Close Figure 1 5 Login Menu Selection Any of these actions will result in the display of the Login window Lt E WED fen vative Clactronic Oerignuea Figure 1 6 Login Window The user then enters their assigned login identitication and password in the User Name and Pa
50. Updated document number Table of Contents End User License Agreement 4 Overview Launching Enterprise 2 2 Enterprise Navigator Window 3 LOGin LOGOUT cosi Seabahncedceseaedeceseeus 4 Menu Bar 2 ce cee cceccccecceceecees 6 Application Menu d5ct oben lec eos eis ates 6 UU tebe tea els cts eB intel Bin he yt Sich Soot Stee 6 OOS 2 2 alesis sas wore ee shed lala mre nse se out 8 Fle De Stun dant stoner eae ed eae 10 TOODO esd teks Spas Me shite a cate sbat luke aE 11 NOS VIEW oosecdceeier orraa e 12 Tasks and Details 0 0 0 0 222020 13 SIOIUS BON eseo e Geode eas eee as 15 Titan Channel Configuration 17 Titan Channel Settings 2 2 22 18 Inputs and Zone Manager 22 Bs be EEIT eee UNEA hae 24 Ambient Analysis 2 2222 02 02eeeeeee 27 ASII SENSOR wauk ats dceocesnsuess aE 30 ANDON see eae eee et er nT ie o E 32 De eps ses toes ees erga AE 34 Channel Settings Storage 2 2 35 Channel Settings Menu Reference 37 FileMenu 2oeet oh hos elit eta leased 37 Edit Men wag tect se en a a a 38 IWOIMMORIVIGIU has 2 02 0 peck Racin dell 602 eh tank Gto Sue an 39 Help Menu ye areen dete ace beaded 4 EG OONOMS on 5220 enecd slate etecind cusses ace Se 42 Titan IPAU Config Tool 47 IPAU Config Tool Interface 22 48 MENUS lt c
51. Users Ter or aga Q T ACS SION Card Send Data Priorities Announcem User Groups FAS Templates Companies cy 596 Monitor Test Frame Definitions p Gateway Computer M 540 Ambient Analysis z About Device ID 550 Device Type 504 ACS 510CPU Figure 9 1 Enterprise Navigator Window 131 Will TED Chapter 9 PDRP Messages oeenn vests PDRP Messages Viewer Double click the PDRP Messages icon as shown in Figure 9 1 to open the Viewer Figure 9 2 This window provides a list of all PDRP messages programmed in the announcement controllers PDRP messages are global and apply to all announcement controllers in the system This window provides access to edit or delete PDRP messages as well as add new ones add 9 edit Delete Print PDRPs Entry Code Description gt Moving Sidewalk Ending 1 1702 Please Stand to the Right 1703 Security Level is Orange _ 1704 K9 Dogs J 1705 IAD Test 1706 Emergency Override 1 1707 Curbside J 1708 Curbside LJ 1728 Checkpoint 11729 Checkpoint C 1 1730 Checkpoint E J 1751 Curbside Parking _ 1752 No Smoking 1753 Unattended Baggage 17 Record s E Figure 9 2 PDRP Messages Viewer Double click any message in the list to open the PDRP Message Editor window for that message lt lt x J Add 3 Edit X Delete 3 Print PDRPs Entry Code Description 23 Records ot Figure 9
52. address 255 Will TED Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto TestConfiguration _inmevative Electronic Designs 256 e Anumeric identifier for the frame This number is often called the 124 device handle It is unique to the system and is used by some low level tools to identity the frame Test Sequences The edits in the Test Sequences group box allow for creating deleting and modifying the name and basic options of a test Each of these edits is discussed in detail in the following paragraphs The Test Sequences list box on the left of the Test Sequences group box allows for the selection of existing tests so that they may be edited The Add button in the Test Sequences group box adds a new test with a default schedule which is not enabled The Delete button in the Test Sequences group box deletes the currently selected test Note Every amplifier frame leaves the factory with two default test sequences These settings are labelled Periodic Test and System Test The Periodic test which is sometimes referred to as the Inaudible test cannot be deleted and modification of this test is discouraged The Test Sequence Description edit box allows tor editing the name of the selected test This name appears in the Test Sequences list box as well as in the column headers of the Auto Tests and the Auto Test Contiguration windows Below the Test Sequence Description edit box are tour checkboxes which affect how the frame
53. be used by the DRP Editor Recommended Recording Practices IED has always prided itself on delivering professionally recorded audio takes with levels and sound characteristics consistent throughout the years To help ensure your audio takes match these characteristics and levels please use the following guidelines when recording audio for use in an IED system 162 Use an omni directional mic to help eliminate proximity effect Use a pop filter or wind screen to reduce plosives Record the vocalist with all EQ adjustments set flat Ifa compressor is used use sparingly and do not introduce any pumping effects Record with the nominal audio level around 5dBfs as viewed with a peak program meter All audio recordings should be done in a relatively noise free environment free of noise from mechanical equipment or other noise sources After on site recorded takes have been installed it is recommended that listening tests be performed on the ACS system PA by comparing playback of the new takes against standard IED supplied takes and general mic station pages to ensure that new takes match in consistency and level Wim TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 1 1 DRP Editor Launching the DRP Editor The DRP Editor can be opened in a number of ways Typically the application is opened by clicking on the IED DRP Editor menu item from the Tools menu in IED Enterprise as shown in Figure 11 1 Tools Help Ea Database Registr
54. both time edits show the same time then there is no limit on what time a test runs automatically Days Edit This document refers to the edit below the time edits as the Days edit This edit control specifies the days on which a test schedule runs the selected test If no days are selected then the test will not be run on this schedule To edit the selected days click on the button in this edit and the Day Selection dialog box opens see Figure 15 11 This dialog box contains a checkbox tor each day of the week as well as tour quick buttons which select only the days specitied on the button The OK button saves changes to the day selection and closes the dialogue box The Cancel button cancels any changes and closes the dialogue box Iv Mon Fri r Iw Sat and Sun a I Friday All Days If Saturday F Sunday Clear All col Figure 15 11 Day Selection dialog Interval Edit This document refers to the bottom spin edit as the Interval edit This edit control specifies in seconds how often the selected test is run during the allowed times on the allowed days Generally this value should not be shorter than 60 seconds This edit is meaningless and therefore disabled if the Once Per Day checkbox is checked OK The OK button saves any changes which have been made and then closes the window Cancel The Cancel button discards any changes which have been and closes the window 258 min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chap
55. button discards any changes which have been and closes the window 26 ul TED Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto Test Configuration Innovative Electronic Designs About Window The About window provides copyright version and location information about the T9160 DLL sottware from which the Titan Auto Test windows are loaded The information on this screen is often used to verity the installed version of this DLL About T9160 DLL T9160 BLL ees Copyright 1999 2009 229 4 4 Innovative Electronic F Designs LLC File Information Version 2 0 5 1 May 26 2010 Date Modified 5 26 2010 4 21 28 PM Size af 7 FRB Location Cied ED Enterprise Lib T9160 0LL Figure 15 13 About Window Pressing the OK button closes this window 262 System Supervision System Supervision is a sub system of the IED system that includes several components The core component of this teature is the System Supervision Service that is an application that runs in the background of the Windows operating system on the server computer This service receives and logs fault reports received trom devices that report various status information It also polls network devices for their current status and faults Accessing System Supervision Features 22 20 eee eee cee eee eee eens 264 COMMUNES seas tenes ang ont te hee a e cau denise was iecen Meas awee 265 A ATEN At 8 0 Lf RR eee eee me een eg ec ene ee Se a Pe ne TORO CO SRS RENE ee 2
56. child objects that are grouped under a higher level parent object Parent objects are typically higher level objects such as an ACS CPU card that has direct control of other devices Microphone stations and T9160 Amplifier Mainframes are examples of devices that are child objects because they must be associated to a parent announcement controller device Individual branches can be expanded or collapsed by clicking on the or icons to the left of the object Groups and parent objects represent branches that can be expanded to reveal their associated child objects 12 Wia JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter l Overview Tasks and Details The Tasks and Details section of the Navigator window is used to display information and configuration options for the item currently selected in the Tree View The view will change based on the item selected Three examples are shown and described below ACS Specific Tasks Mics Zones System wide Tasks FA A R 7 A En Languages Takes FAS variables Zone Groups Entry Code PDRP System Definitions Messages Settings EN 20 p a k o va _ Mic Station Send Data Priorities Announcem User Groups FAS Templates Companies Users Definitions General 0 About Figure 1 23 Tasks and Details tor 51OCPU Figure 1 23 shows the window when a 510CPU object is selected in the Tree View For this item there are icons that represent specific tasks that can be performed for this component of
57. content of this document is furnished for informational use only and is subject to change without notice It should not be construed as a commitment by Innovative Electronic Designs LLC Innovative Electronic Designs LLC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in the informational content contained in this document Any reference to company names in examples are for demonstration purposes only and are not intended to refer to any actual organization oran endorsement of any kind Innovative Electronic Designs IED GLOBALCOM vACS 500ACS 500ACS Announcement Control System CAS Courtesy Announcement System T CAS FAS Flight Announcement System IED On Call IED On Call amp Design and LANcom are all registered trademarks or trademarks of Innovative Electronic Designs LLC in the United States and or other countries CobraNet is a registered trade mark of Cirrus Logic in the United States and or other countries Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server SQL Server and Internet Explorer are all registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Innovative Electronic Designs LLC 9701 Taylorsville Road Louisville KY 40299 United States of America www iedaudio com Document Number 901C Publication History July 20 2012 Added System Supervision Chapter January 31 2013 Added VisDID contig chapter December 9 2013
58. delete the item to avoid accidental deletion Caution This action is permanent and will delete all configuration settings for all devices within the selected tree branch and cannot be undone Tools This menu provides quick access shortcuts to other application modules used to control and contigure the system Tools BG IED DRF Editor g Cail TED Enterprise Dashboard SA TED Print Manager ay PasswordManagerContig exe Figure 1 14 Tools Menu While the specitic tools available may vary based on the specitic installation the four 4 most common tools provided are listed below The usage of each is described in their respective sections of this manual IED DRP Editor This application is used tor editing audio takes used as messages in the system It is used to record new audio takes or edit existing takes It is capable of importing and exporting system formatted takes to other file formats It provides basic audio editing functions and is used to match audio levels of takes so messages sound consistent in x File Edit View Tools Help Oe2 ae gt Local amp Record jeslat 4GGik 4b EEE Select omp To 1852 Z volume 0 2 ar ae sae Ref Level 5 00 dB x C IED IED Enterprise Plugins take9499 way User Jason Kleiman Total 4 49s L 0 00s R 4 49s Ui Figure 1 15 DRP Editor Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter l Overview IED Enterprise
59. e Start Time This is the time when the message will start playing on days dates when it is active e Stop Time This is the time when a message will stop playing on days dates when it is active Note The start and stop times are in 24 hour clock format e Minutes Between Plays This is the time in minutes between the start of one message play and the start of the following message play It zero then the message plays continuously back to back e Use Restricted Dates This will restrict message playback to days that fall within the range defined in the Start Date and Stop Date tields 14 Will TED Chapter 9 PDRP Messages oeenn vests e Start Stop Date This is a range of dates in which to play this message when the Use Restricted Dates checkbox is checked Selecting this box will open a calendar box as shown Figure 9 15 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat i 2 3 4 5 7 8 L 46 6 i7 B wm m 25 2 Click to use todays date Taday 11 11 2010 Figure 9 15 Date Selection Calendar e Days of the Week These checkboxes specify which days to allow the message to play Note Multiple schedule entries can be set for the same PDRP message One schedule entry may be defined to play the message between certain hours on weekdays and a second entry to play different hours on the weekend Assemble Take Tab Figure 9 16 shows the Assemble Take tab with a PDRP message created to play in a single l
60. editor form for the zone group highlighted in the Zone Groups Viewer Alternatively double clicking on a zone group in the viewer will also open the editor q Previous gt Next OK Cancel Figure 7 5 Next Previous Buttons Editing an existing zone group opens a window with two additional buttons as shown in Figure 7 5 Clicking on the Previous and Next buttons allows quick navigation to the previous and next records in the viewer Navigating to a new record via the Next and Previous buttons atter making changes to the data in the editor will result in a contirmation prompt as shown in Figure 7 6 The prompt options are as follows e Yes Save current changes before navigating away e No Do not save changes before navigating away e Yes to All Save current and all subsequent changes while navigating using the Previous and Next buttons without any additional prompts x y Data has changed Do you want to save current data before mowing to another one G W Mo Yes to all Figure 7 6 Edit Confirmation Dialog Box Edit a Zone Group The steps necessary to edit an existing zone group are as follows Note Referto Zone Group Editor on page 116 for details on the Zone Group Editor window 1 Click on the Zone Groups icon from the Enterprise Navigator window to open the Zone Group Viewer Highlight a zone group in the Zone Groups Viewer Click the Edit button to open the Zone Group Editor
61. enchant tet nonoo a hla a dda o noon n hes one de 174 TOONS AVIS eenaa a e a a aa a oe a aS 176 PISMO Pei EES E EEA E EEA A E 180 Hote ala AAA E E EEEE TEE 181 161 Will TED Chapter II DRP Editor tative etcetera Destane DRP Recording The DRP Editor provides users with the ability to add their own message recordings to a system IED has reserved the take number range of 9401 through 9500 for all user recorded messages This take range must be used in order to avoid conflicts with other takes already recorded in the take library If take numbers outside of this range are used then it is likely that they will be lost when system upgrades are performed or if a hard drive is replaced IED recommends that all custom on site takes be sent to IED to be archived on our network This will ensure that takes are preserved and can be restored on the system during upgrades or hardware replacements Audio File Formats The ACS hardware uses a proprietary file format for recorded audio This file format is referred to as a DAX file and uses a file extension of dax appended to filenames A standard PC audio file format is known as a WAV file and uses the wav file extension The DRP Editor supports both types of file formats and the ability to freely convert between them WAV files must be 16 bit mono with a sample rate of 16 kHz 16 000 Hz Audio files that do not match these parameters must first be converted by another application before they can
62. enter the password to verity it was typed correctly The system will compare this field with the Password field and notify the user if there are any discrepancies First Name This field is used for the user s legal first name which may or may not be associated with their username Last Name This tield is used tor the user s legal last name which may or may not be associated with their username Language Select a language appropriate for this user from the droplist box For those parts of Enterprise that have language localization this selection will automatically change the menus and other controls to the language for this user when they login to the system Max Connections This setting specities the number of concurrent logins that this user can have without first logging off at another location computer For example it the number in this window is set to 1 the user can only long on at a second location computer in the system after logging off at the first If the number is set at 3 the user can log on at a third location while already logged on at two other locations Disabled When checked the Max Connections feature is disabled and there are no restrictions on the number of points in the system where this user can remain logged on OK Click this button to save changes and close the window Cancel Click this button to discard the changes and close the window 207 Will TED Chapter 13 Password Managemen
63. event Double clicking the event in the list will also open the event for editing Delete Click this button to delete the highlighted event Apply Click this button to activate any changes without closing the application OK Click this button to close the application and save any changes that have been made Debug Service This is an option used for system debugging and should remain unchecked File Menu The only item currently available under the File menu is the Exit option Select this option or select the X located in the top right corner of the window to close the Time Talker application R IED Time Talker Con Eile Edit Help Exit h Figure 12 6 File Menu 187 Will TED Chapter 12 TimeTalker i tnovative ete ctronte vests Edit Menu The Edit menu provides functions to add edit or delete time events These three menu items correspond to the three buttons available on the toolbar The last three options available in this menu open the windows necessary to properly contigure Time Talker Each contiguration window is described in Time Talker Setup on page 189 y IED Time Talker Config File Edit Help k E Add Edit Delete T User Options fone Map Setup Frame Options Figure 12 7 Edit Menu Help Menu Currently the only available item in the Help menu is the option to show the application s About box as shown in Figure 12 8 This provides the version number and build date of th
64. is the sole owner of all rights in the Software including copyrights patents trademarks and other intellectual property rights all copies modifications enhancements and derivative works created therefrom subject only to the license expressly granted herein This License does not provide You with ownership of the Software or a copy of it but only a right of limited use Restrictions You may not reverse engineer or assemble decompile decode or otherwise translate the Software You shall not remove any copyright notice or other proprietary or restrictive notice or legend contained or included in or on any Software or other material provided by IED and You shall reproduce copy and include all such information on all copies made including such copies for archival or backup purposes You shall use Your best efforts to assist IED in identifying any use copying or disclosure of any portion of the Software by any of Your present or former personnel contrary to the terms of this License Termination You may terminate this License at any time by returning the Software and all copies and extracts thereof to IED You are not entitled to a refund upon Your termination In addition to other available remedies IED may at its option terminate this License if You fail to pay any fees due or fail to carry out any other obligation under this License Upon IED s termination of this License You are required to return or destroy and certify destruction as reques
65. local ACS This is the ACS whose mic station will be used for recording and retrieving take tiles for the application Play Take Out Takes can be played through the speaker output of the computer it speakers are connected or by temporarily downloading it to the ACS Some systems will have the output of the sound card connected to an input on the ACS If this is the case the take can be played as a Line In connection on the ACS Only one method can be used to play take audio at any given time e Zone Group to Play to The local zone group to use when playing take audio through the AGS e Mic Station to user for recording The mic station that will be used to record takes Play All This option plays the entire audio take A red vertical line tracks the segment of the audio that is being played and the status bar at the bottom of the main window shows the status of the request Play Selected This option plays the audio in the selected region of the take A red vertical line tracks the segment of the audio that is being played and the status bar at the bottom of the main window shows the status of the request 178 min JED LEOA ANACRE SE 00 T T TDR Ector Stop This option stops playing the take It is unavailable when the audio play method is setup in the Contiguration window to play takes by downloading to the ACS Pause Resume This option pauses playback if playing or resumes the playback if paused It is unavailable
66. setting or directly entering an attenuation value in the box using the keyboard 20 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Channel Settings Training Room IPAU 10 2 131 125 p0096 Amplifier Channel Inputs and Zone Manager oe era 14 9 Gate C4 Model 6472 z Program Source Background Music Source Page Zone E Channel 1B OK 24 11 Ticketing Area 5 Audio Input 34 20 Local BGM 10 Gate C5 Channel Out 2B 12 Baggage Claim A Atten E Level 34 3 4 4 5 5 6 oO 13 Baggage Claim B 25 1 Duck Level 25 Duck Level 25 Zone State Idle o 14 Upper Curbside 15 20 0 dB 15 20 0 dB 15 Lower Curbside E 15 Page Bus 0 6 I Page Priority 192 o 16 Concourse A 17 Concourse B 3 r an 18 Concourse C AS 3 F r 19 Security Checkpoint Queing 6B 20 Security Checkpoint po 42 7A 21 Food Court es j 48 f 7B 22 Rental Car Area IV Mute l Mute Mute 54 84 23 Parking Garage 60 E 8B 24 Test Zone 25 0 dB 73 0 egg tri mn L 8 Figure 2 5 Titan Channel Settings Channel Out Status Bar The Status Bar on the Channel Settings window has six sections three text sections and three graphic sections These sections are described in the following list e The lett most text section displays information on background processes
67. show all zone groups in the list Print This button interfaces with the IED Print Manager software to open the print preview window containing the zone groups data Refer to the IED Print Manager section for more information on this feature OK Click the OK button to close the Zone Groups Viewer 115 Will TED Chapter Zone Group Setup Innovative Electronic Designs Zone Group Editor 116 Adding a new zone group or editing an existing zone group will open the Zone Group Editor window as shown in See h1 SectionTitle on page 116 When the cursor is moved to be above the Entry Code edit box a pop up balloon help appears with the range of values valid tor the selected zone group type and for this announcement controller There are two tabs on this window General and Destination and they can be changed by clicking on the appropriate tab at the top of the window Zone Group Editor x i alid Entry Code Range s 101 199 Zone Group Type 7 Local Zone Groups 1 Location pni o o o ooo User Groups 1 All Call 2 All Call Emergency 3 Communication Center OK Cancel Figure 7 9 Zone Group Editor General Tab Details tor the contiguration options available on each tab are detined below For step by step instructions on adding editing or deleting zone groups refer to the previous pages General Tab Entry Code The value to be entered in a mic station o
68. the data on the form oe Click the OK button to save the changes and close the window Note The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to discard changes and return to the viewer form Delete Click the Delete button to remove the selected PDRP Message from the system The user is prompted tor confirmation Figure 9 7 before the selected record is erased In addition to erasing one record at atime multiple messages can be selected at once Select multiple messages by holding down the CTRL key while clicking on the records Click the Delete button after all selections have been made x Are you sure you want to delete selected record s Fi Ho Cancel i Figure 9 7 Delete Confirmation Dialog Box Delete a PDRP Message 1 Double click on the PDRP Messages icon from the Enterprise Navigator window to open the Viewer 2 Highlight a message in the Viewer window or select multiple messages by holding down the CTRL key while clicking 3 Click the Delete button located on the toolbar 4 Click the Yes button to delete the selected group s The Cancel or No buttons can be clicked at any time to cancel the delete operation and return to the viewer form Print This button interfaces with the IED Print Manager software to open the print preview window containing the PDRP Messages data Refer to the IED Print Manager section for more information on this feature OK Click the OK button
69. the sum of both the ambient noise in the space and the program audio trom the system The Ambient Analysis algorithm tilters out the audio system s contribution to the overall level and provides a real value of ambient noise level to the system for processing 28 iin JED Innovative Electronic pesigas 0000 Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Threshold The threshold determines the level at which the ambient noise compensation is suspended because the level at the sensor is too low When the detected level from the ambient noise sensor rises above the threshold setting then the system will actively operate It will filter the system program audio component trom the detected level to accurately adjust the output attenuation based on the calculated noise level When the level is below the threshold the system will stop actively adjusting the output attenuation and return to the maximum attenuation setting which is the base level setting as detined by the Channel Out level control The threshold is set by adjusting the slider with the mouse or by manually typing a value in the edit box below the slider using a positive numerical value Gain Calc Scaling Constant The Scaling Constant determines the amount of ambient noise level that will result in the output level to increase by 1dB A scaling constant of 1 will result in the output level increasing by 1dB for each 1dB increase in ambient sensor level Figure 2 11 shows a scaling
70. the system Each icon will open the respective editor window associated with that task For example double clicking on the Mics icon will open the mic station editor window to allow individual microphone stations associated with this system to be contigured Mic Number Location Mic Station Type Device ID J Training Room Equipment Rack S20 mic station 505 10 Gate C4 Jetway 526 mic station 5954 11 Gate C4 Ticket Counter 520 mic station 556 J lz Gate CS Ticket Counter S20 mic station S20 13 Gate C5 Jetway 526 mic station 551 J 14 Sim 520 mic station 566 _ 16 S20 Desktop Handheld S20 Mic Station Themis 631 J 20 Microphone Station Sim 526 mic station 567 Figure 1 24 Tasks and Details for Mic Stations Figure 1 24 shows the Tasks and Details window that will appear when the Mic Stations icon is selected in the Tree View This is a different type of display than the previous example in that it does not contain icons that access different configuration windows In this case it is a table of the microphone stations that are currently programmed in the system Double clicking on any of the items in the list will open the mic station editor window for the selected mic station Will TED Chapter l Overview Innovative Electronic Designs 14 Training Room IPAU 10 2 131 125 20096 tas Channel Test Meter Bridge Settings Cards Channels Card 1 Enabled LY Channel 14 9 Gate C4 UY Channel 1B 10 Gate C5
71. the tour test points in Titan amplifier frame is provided in the following list 246 iil JED Innovative Electronic Besigne 00 Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto Test Configuration Ambient Out The Ambient Out point allows signal measurement atter all digital signal processing is complete but prior to the signal being converted to analog tor amplification Amp Input The Amp Input point allows signal measurement after the signal is converted to analog but before amplification Amp Output The Amp Output point allows measurement of the audio signal after amplification The values measured on this point are affected by the load and condition of the speaker circuit Speaker Current The Speaker current point is measured at the same place in the signal chain as the Amp Output point but is a current measurement rather than a voltage measurement Changes in the speaker circuit s load usually result in noticeable changes in the value measured at this point The text in the header rows provides organizational descriptions of the data in the grid s columns The header row for the first two columns simply show one title per column but header rows for the remaining columns show a more complex organization where several columns share titles in the tirst and second rows The meanings of each column title and their organizational meaning are provided in the following list Zone The Zone column lists the page zone if any assigned to each of
72. this button to clear the settings for the selected point in the monitor point grid Import Click this button to import monitor data from a version 6 ACS Toolset System Click this button to send points to the Gateway and close the window iil JED innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 14 596 Series Test Configuration Cancel Click this button to close the window without saving any changes Apply Click this button to send data to the Gateway without closing the window 217 Will TED Chapter 14 596 Series Test Configuration tnnevative tleetromte pestare Test Results Test results are divided into three different categories These categories are represented by three tabs as shown in Figure 14 4 iew Test Results x ACS Output Test Results External Test Results Mic Test Results American Airlines Gate E5 Zone 1 United Airlines Gate E6 Zone 2 Baggage Claim Area Zone 3 Ticketing Area Zone 4 Upper Curbside Zone 5 Lower Curbside Zone 6 Security Checkpoint Zone 7 Concourse Zone 8 Test Zone Zone 16 1 1 i F i 1 i 1 i 0 09 0 0 0 0 a amp o o co co co oO oOo 0 Figure 14 4 View Test Results Display Faults Only Check this box to filter the result and display only the points that have tested out of tolerance When lett un checked test results for all points are displayed Close Click the Close button to exit the window ACS Output Test Results Tab This tab displays
73. to All Copy to All Figure 15 8 Copy Deviation Pop up Menu e Copy To Checked Copies the selected value to both positive and negative deviations of all checked points under the selected test and frequency e Copy To Checked Copies the selected value to only the positive deviations of all checked points under the selected test and frequency e Copy To Checked Copies the selected value to only the negative deviations of all checked points under the selected test and frequency e Copy To All Copies the selected value to both positive and negative deviations of all points under the selected test and trequency automatically selecting all points e Copy To All Copies the selected value to only the positive deviations of all points under the selected test and trequency automatically selecting all points e Copy To All Copies the selected value to only the negative deviations of all points under the selected test and trequency automatically selecting all points OK The OK button saves any changes which have been made and then closes the Auto Test Contiguration window Cancel The Cancel button discards any changes which have been made to the point contiguration of each test and closes the Auto Test Configuration window Status Bar The Auto Test Contiguration window s Status Bar has tive sections two text sections and three graphic sections These sections are described in the following list
74. types to display This allows the user to only view zone groups of the types selected in the Filter By menu A check next to the zone group type indicates the current filter setting 114 iin JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter Zone Group Setup X Delete Filter Z Print Yada eit Zone Groups Entry Code Location Tie Show All Emergency 2one Groups Local Zone Groups 1 10 US AIRWAYS GATE CONCOURSE ii us AIRWAYS GATES CONCOURSE TICH Oca cone Groups 2 Viz BAGGAGE B C Local Zone Groups 3 LJ 13 US AIRWAYS ALL Local Zone Groups 4 j 16 CONTINETAL GATES CONCOURSE Local Zone Groups 5 17 CONTINENTAL GATESICONTCOURSE TIE Network Recorded Announcement PEE BAGGAGE D Terminal Zone Groups 19 CONTINENT SL ALL TALL Test Snmenmceanene E 20 TERMINAL TEST FROM 1 4 z1 UNITED GATES COMNCOURSE Terminal Zone Groups 22 UNITED GATES CONCOURSE TICKETING Terminal Zone Groups z3 AIRTRAMNUNITED BAGGAGE Terminal Zone Groups j 24 UNITED ALL CALL Terminal Zone Groups 25 BWA ALL CALL Terminal Zone Groups 297 Record s 4A Figure 7 8 Zone Group Viewer Filter Filter the Zone Groups list 1 Click on the Zone Groups icon trom the Enterprise Navigator window to open the Zone Group Viewer 2 Click the Filter button then move the cursor down to highlight the Filter By menu item 3 Select the zone group type to be displayed Select Show All to
75. used to perform the record edit function In a multi ACS system click this button to transter the take to all ACS maintrames in the system VIS Tab VIS tiles are small tiles that contain the text tor the take along with timing information used to properly show the take text on a visual display when used for visual paging When a new take is created a corresponding VIS tile must be created to provide information to the visual paging system Create VIS Click this button to generate the VIS tile and transter it to the appropriate announcement controller 159 Will TED Chapter 0 Takes 00 nnnttne atcerete neta Figure 10 12 VIS Tab 160 DRP Editor The DRP Editor is a standalone application that is part of the IED Enterprise suite of software It allows the user to record new takes or modity existing takes stored on the announcement controller The following sections describe how to use the DRP Editor DRP Recording naaccdeccolei ewes aoensieeen oaa oaoa oaao ocean ute 162 Audio File Formats 0 cece cece cc ccc cece oaaao oaaao aooaa Loon u 162 Recommended Recording Practices 2 ies ede Siac cee eel ioe 162 Ea nching Me DRP EdFOT carcs Stte to eect Ae es ett oe ete tins ot 163 Main Window Overview ccc cece ccc cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccees 165 PORO a aeae Gubeuiec Ga AM Gee eee ee tt ett ee 166 R EAN a 2 tile lane dence eee E E AAN EA 166 EORNA ee eer a Poe eee Re E A e a aA aA a 171 View Menu
76. which prevent editing such as make permanent e The center text section displays the following list of calibration status messages e Starting Calibration The system has begun the automatic calibration process e Stopped Valid Calibration The calibration was completed successfully e Stopped by User The Stop button was clicked before calibration was completed e The right text section displays the currently logged in user or the words Not Logged In if no user is logged in e The lett graphic section indicates if the Channel Settings window is correctly communicating with the database Green indicates good communications and red indicates a problem with database communications e The center graphic section indicates if the Channel Settings window is communicating with the amplitier trame Green indicates good communications and red indicates that the window is not communicating with the frame The right most graphic section becomes animated to show when the sottware becomes busy with background processing 2 Will TED Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration tnovative etectromtc bestane Inputs and Zone Manager The Inputs and Zone Manager Figure 2 6 window has three sections Program Source Background Music Source and Page Zone Channel Settings Training Room IPAU 10 2 131 125 0096 5 xj Amplifier Channel Inputs and Zone Manager Amp aoe 14 9 Gate C4 Model 6472 Bisat
77. x 1744 Add Item Delete Item Select Message No Smoking in Airport Unattended Baggage Weather Warning Figure 6 15 The features of this panel are as follows Title Scroll Box Properties This is the text that appears at the top of the scroll box when it is visible Width This setting controls the width of the scroll box It is important to note that if text in the scroll box exceeds this width it will get cut off This width can be no wider than the 528 screen width which is 320 pixels Background Colors This selects the background colors for the items in the scroll box The background for the title bar selected and unselected items are each configured independently 10 Will TED Chapter 6 528 Interface Designer Innovative Electronic Designs Text Colors This selects the text font colors for the items in the scroll box The text colors for the title bar selected and unselected items are each contigured independently Items Scroll box items are added to edited moved or deleted from this item list To move the position of the item in the scroll box drag the tirst column with the grey box to a new location in the list Add Item Click this button to add a new item to the bottom of the list The position of the new item can then be arranged appropriately in the list by clicking and dragging the row Delete Item Click this button to immediately remove the highlight
78. 1002 American Airlines F 1 6 _ 1003 Delta Air Lines F 1 6 _ 1004 U s Airways F 1 8 Jj 1005 British Airways F 1 4 1006 Canadian Airlines F 1 7 _ 1007 Lufthansa F T2 _ 1008 KLM Royal Dutch Airlines F 2 9 _ 1009 Twa F 1 6 _j 1010 Continental Airlines F 1 6 1011 Northwest Airlines F 1 9 _ 1012 Southwest Airlines F 1 7 _ 1013 Department of National Defense F 2 X Ma Assembled Message X Delete Selected OK Cancel Figure 9 17 Assemble Takes Edit Window The controls on this window are as follows Takes List This is a list of the takes available on the system and is where takes are selected to be added to a message This list can be both searched by take number and filtered by take type to make finding specific takes easier It also displays specific information about each take e Take Number This is the take as identified by the system Take numbers are also used as the filename for the actual take file in the format of lt TakeNumber gt DAX 143 Will TED Chapter Q PDRP Messages Innovative Electronic Designs 144 e Description This is the text of the take Only the first part of the text will fit in the list due to the width of the column When the cursor hovers over a take flyover help appears to show the entire text e Gender M indicates that this take uses a male voice F indicates that it is a female VOICE e Duration This is the duration in seconds of the take Insert Tak
79. 101 0 None M jz 102 102 0 None M Js 103 103 0 Mone M J4 106 106 0 None M Js 105 105 0 Mone M je 1701 moving walkway O None O LI 1702 security chkpt O None O js 1703 no smoking O Mone O Figure 4 12 520 Series Button Combination Combined Zone Group Entry Code 520 series mic stations only This is the entry code sent to the announcement controller when the mic switch or announce button is pressed while combined buttons are active Sidekick Properties Tab Sidekicks are available as an expansion option for the 528 mic stations Each 528 mic station supports up to three expansion stations that are available in two types e 5285K This is a 4 button expansion station that can be programmed to page different areas e 520FME This is a simple expansion station that only has the mic switch PTT button Note This feature requires the optional 528E expansion board to be installed on the 528 mic station 72 min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 4 Microphone Station Setup Mic Station Editor 2 Groups Companies amp Gates Key amp Button Assignements Sidekick Properties Additional Properties 4 wg These properties are only available to a 528 mic station with the Sidekick n Support Feature enabled Expansion Ports FORF Zonemap Override 102 Gate 42 O Mone 100 Concourse 4 Mone 1743 Unattended Baggage 90 Terminal 10 All Call 0 None q Previous Mext Figure
80. 3 Viewer Toolbar 132 mijn JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter Q PDRP Messages The toolbar located at the top of the Viewer provides quick access to the commands needed to add edit delete or print messages Add Click the Add button to open the PDRP Editor with a new message entry as shown in Figure 9 4 PDRP Editor xj General Langua ble Take Destination J alid Entry Code Range s 1701 1800 Entry C k j Description Fenter description Priority Terminal bi Audio Level Offset 0 dB 15 to 6 Enable Monitoring Enable Partial Activation Play OK Cancel Figure 9 4 PDRP Message Editor New Message Add New PDRP Message The steps necessary for adding a new PDRP message are as follows Note Refer to the PDRP Message Editor on PDRP Editor on page 136 for details on the PDRP Message Editor window 1 Double click on the PDRP Messages icon from the Enterprise Navigator window to open the Viewer 2 Click the Add button to open the PDRP Editor 3 Enter an unused entry code for the new PDRP Message Valid range s of numbers available for messages will be listed in the pop up help when the cursor is placed over the entry code text box 4 Type in a description of the message in the Description entry box 5 Select the appropriate announcement type in the Priority droplist box 6 Leave the Audio Level Offset at O tor a new message This can be adjust
81. 59PM e Next Day checkbox If checked then the end time is on the next day This allows time windows to span midnight For example a day could be detined to start at 6 00AM and play until 1 00AM the next morning 192 iin JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 12 Time Talker Time Events The Time Talker event schedule is a repeating schedule that cycles through every hour Events are defined to play at a relative minute after the top of the hour For example if the time is to be played only at the top of the hour then the Time field would be 00 to indicate that the event is to play every hour It the time is to also play at the bottom half of the hour then the Time field would be set at 30 to indicate that the event should play 30 minutes after the hour Figure 12 12 shows a schedule with time events set to play every 15 minutes Each event will only play once in any given hour and it can only play in one language Multiple events must be created one for each language in order to play multi lingual time announcements y IED Time Talker Configuration Ioj x File Edit Help METEIS Time Events Language ACS Name 00 English T raining Room Titan ACS 15 Spanish Training Room Titan ACS 30 English Training Room Titan ACS 745 Spanish Training Room Titan ACS Debug Service Apply OK Figure 12 12 Time Talker Define Events Events are programmed using the Define Events window as sh
82. 62 70 76 86 94 102 15 23 31 39 47 5 63 71 79 67 95 103 111 anya a A OUO N a ow MN N oO aw J n on Q oO oa oO J J oO on 16 24 32 40 468 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 4 Previous P Next OK Cancel Figure 7 10 Zone Group Editor Destination Tab Entry Code The value to be entered in a mic station or assigned to a mic station button or pop up menu that will access this zone map This value must be in the defined range for the selected Zone Group Type droplist box located on the General tab When the mouse cursor is held above the Entry Code edit box it displays the valid range of numbers in a pop up balloon help box This is the same as on the General Tab shown here also for convenience Announcement Controller Tabs These tabs are for selecting each announcement controller in order to view and select zones on that device For some types of announcements only the tab for the selected device will be visible and the remaining tabs will be hidden Local announcements will only show the local announcement controller tab Terminal and Emergency announcements will show all tabs Zone Array On each tab there is an array of zones available on that device Toggle the selection of each zone on or off by clicking on it to determine membership to this zone group Multiple sequential zones may be selected by clicking the first zone holding the SHIFT key then selecting the last zone in the seque
83. 67 DEWiCS MORMONING trite tte et ote Ste tobe oats eS he Ad ete as 269 Fam Wes Cris antes Osos atk Ses ecto al ei eee hele 270 EENES 101 S SEIA eee TaD OP RCI SPN Ere a RE SAR REO 24 IED Network Fault Numbering fit 2 ince rudd dc cenced tiled ahora d gob ea ee Boas 274 263 Will TED Chapter 1G System Supervision Innovative Electronic Designs Accessing System Supervision Features System Supervision is a teature of 590 Servers and as such contiguration for it can be tound associated with 590 Server devices in IED Enterprise Options to view faults setup relays etc become available when a 590 Server is selected as shown in Figure 16 1 E ED Enterprise System Supervision Jar i 7 ie Configure view Faults Deervice Fault Reley Setup Monitor Geseriptions y Crestron OMJ ag Universal Power Supply 590 Remote lclierk no Figure 16 1 Accessing System Supervision Controls Each section below describes one of the System Supervision features shown Configure View Faults Device Monitoring Fault Descriptions and Relay Setup 264 min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 16 System Supervision Configure This icon opens a window that allows adjustment of the polling rate response time out etc of the System Supervision background process Usually one does not have to tweak anything in this window as System Supervision is automatically contigured with optimal settings And in tact only a
84. 9 Current Date Time in Frame Tue 2010 10 19 10 49 16 Flash version 2 7 5 0 10064 date Aug 21 2009 Set Date and Time w Data Figure 3 3 General Tab The controls on this tab are as follows CIEI PAU Name This is the name of the device and is usually the model number of the unit It can be changed if necessary but it is recommended that the IPAU Location field be used to describe the unit IPAU Location This field is used to store additional information about the frame It can be used to indicate the frame number in a system with multiple frames or it can be used to describe the physical location where it is installed CE Get Data Click this button to retrieve the data trom the frame necessary to populate all fields on this tab The F5 key is also used to execute this command GSD send Data Click this button to send the data on the tab to the trame The F4 key is also used to execute this command GSES Keep Current Device Handle Bundle Numbers Select this option to keep the current CobraNet device handle transmitter and receiver intormation when sending data to the trame 5 Will TED Chapter 3 Titan IPAU Config Tool TT oee tectonic vests GAL Usc 32 Group 16 Frame Handles Check this box when 16 or more Titan IPAU frames are used in a system This will ensure that the correct device handles are used GSD Calculate New Device Handle Bundle Numbers Select this option to use new Cobr
85. All v Airline Airline Freq Flyer Prog Airline Slogan Airport Welcome Baggage Check Baggage Claim Baggage Delay Reason Card Color Cities Clock Indicator Compensation Curbside Parking Emergency Flight Announcement phrase Flight Delay Reason Greeting Letter Meal ed Miscellaneous Audio Moving Walkway No Smoking Number Photo ID Pre Announce Chime Security Checkpoint Time of Day Train Emergency Train Miscelleanous Audio Train Unattended Luggage Trainline Trainline Cities Trainline Slogan Unattended Luggage Figure 9 18 Assemble Takes Filter Criteria To search for a specitic take number enter the number in the Search box and click the icon to search for the take When the take is found it is listed in the Takes area in place of the list as shown in Figure 9 19 The insert append replace button can be used to place the take into the Assembled Message window To get back to the complete list of takes press the ESC key as indicated or select the OK or Cancel buttons Note The search will only search the contents of the Takes List as displayed Thus if a filter has been applied takes not included in that filtered list will not appear in the search Select Show All as the filter criteria in order to search the entire take library 145 Wim TED Chapter 9 PDRP Messages s oee ve stone Click this icon to start the search eter May Pd4 Caution The movtigakorey cording Fi
86. Audible Tests Test Tone Level H 20 dB Deviation ZUKH2 Tests Test Tone Level l 20 dB Deviation sir zr Audio Listening Level Mic Station to use for Bus Test BEIE ZZ Status Figure 14 10 Monitor Test General Tab Audible Tests Test Tone Level This level specifies the output level in dBu for the test tone coming out of the 590A card when an audible set or test is executed Audible Tests Deviation This determines the deviation window for the test results When a test result exceeds the deviation value trom the points set value a tault will be declared For the audible test the deviation is above and below the set level Example Set Value 23dB Deviation 3dB 227 Will TED Chapter 14 596 Series Test Configuration tnnevative tleetromte pestare 228 It the test result of the point is within the range of 25 9 to 22 9 then the point will pass the test It the test result of the point is 26dB or lower or 20 or higher then a fault will be declared 20KHz Tests Test Tone Level This level specities the output level in dBu tor the test tone coming out of the 590A card when a 20kHz set or test is executed 20KHz Tests Deviation This determines the deviation window for the test results When a test result exceeds the deviation value trom the points set value a fault will be declared For the 20kHz test the deviation is below the set level Example Se
87. Color m Select Seq Step Select Emergency Message Select Emergency Areas Figure 6 3 528 Interface Designer Security While the 528 Interface Designer is not part of the main Enterprise application it is still governed by the overall IED System Security service Therefore a user must have permissions assigned for the 528 Interface Designer in the Password Manager configuration The Login Logout process is the same as described in the Overview section of this manual min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 6 528 Interface Designer Templates Each button layout tor a mic station is determined by a template A single template can be used for as many mic stations as needed However each mic station can only have one template loaded at a time Therefore it a mic station must support multiple types of users e g gate agent and emergency personnel then one template must have functions for all users Access to each button is determined by login permissions Opening Adding Renaming and Deleting By default the last template edited will be loaded when the application is started Once started existing templates can be opened for editing or download to mic stations or new templates can be created Open a Template 1 Open the 528 Interface Designer by clicking on the icon located in the IED Application Bar or on the desktop 2 Click the Open Template button on the toolbar This will display the Open Template dialog bo
88. Dashboard The Enterprise Dashboard is a real time system activity monitor It will show current status of microphone stations and zones and is used to monitor the current announcement activity in the system IED Enterprise Dashboard X lol x Application view Tools Help Aton 8 12 All Mic Stations Digital Non Digital all Zones D Card Zone Multi ACS Did 1 9 17 2 2 3 2 pur 4 s N 5 2 F 2 8 11 Not Logged In di Figure 1 16 Enterprise Dashboard IED Print Manager This application is used to print trom a selection of 22 pre defined reports These are useful for archiving system settings They also provide an aid in system contiguration by allowing certain parameters to be printed out and used as a reference while configuring other system options amp IED Print Manager E 10 xl Application Help Logout Es Available Reports Details amp Languages Training Room Titan ACS 550 I FAS Variables Zones Training Room Titan ACS 550 Zone Groups J Entry Code Definitions a PDRP Messages amp System Settings amp Mic Station Users amp Priorities Announcement Definitions AA User Groups rey FAS Templates al Companies Titan Auto Test Configuration Training Room IPAU 605 Ki Ambient Analysis Configuration Training Room IPAU 605 K Ambient Sensors Descriptions oF Channel Zone Assignements Training Room IPAU 605 i Titan Fra
89. Date Reaticed Jeej TWF EE q Previous gt Next Play Figure 9 12 PDRP Editor Play Schedule Tab Unlimited Plays Select this option to repeat the message indefinitely until a stop code is entered from a mic station Stop codes are 100 higher than the entry code used to start the message For example if the PDRP message uses an entry code of 1701 to start then an entry code of 139 Will TED Chapter Q PDRP Messages Innovative Electronic Designs 1801 will stop it Total Number of Plays Select this option to play the message a fixed number of times when triggered from a mic station or external interface Enter the number of plays for the message in the entry box When triggered from a mic station or external closure the message will play the number of times entered unless a stop code is used to terminate it early Note This number cannot be O A number of 15 or higher will result in continuous playback Minutes Between Plays This is the time in minutes between the start of one message play and the start of the following message play If zero then the message plays continuously back to back when initiated from a mic station or external interface Schedules PDRP Editor Ei General Languages User Groups Flay Schedule Assemble Take Destination Unlimited Plays amp Total Number of Plays fi E Minutes Between Plays f Use the following Schedules originating From Training
90. Default Text Table Data trom the Edit menu to open the data table as shown in Figure 6 20 HE Default Text Table Data Editor Text ID Original Text Read Only More Ja Back 5p Mic Humber Not Assigned Waiting For Host Press Mic Switch Fress Announce 0 Button Release Mic Switch Release 4nnounce O Button Entry Code Error Invalid Code a a Enter one Code Error Invalid Zone Code Enter Humeric Selection 3 Error Invalid Entry Enter Arrival Flight Number Error Invalid Flight Humber Enter Flight Humber Error Invalid Flight Humber Enter Airline Code Error Invalid Airline Code Enter Password Error Invalid Password Text to Display on Mic Station 7 T Enter Password Error Invalid Password Save Cancel Error Invalid Flight Number Figure 6 20 Default Text Table Data Screen On this screen select the appropriate tield in the Text to Display on Mic Station column and edit it as necessary Click the Save button to save changes when finished Click Cancel to discard changes and close the window 107 528 Interface Designer This page has been intentionally left blank 108 Zone Group Setup Zone Groups area key element in the Enterprise sottware This is the terminology and method used to define and program functions for system outputs known as page zones Zone Groups consist of one or more zones and are used as elements when configuring microphone sta
91. E NE 40 me e 4B 16 Concourse A eo 18 F ES KSR E f 4 48 5A 17 Concourse B 4 24 Calibration Take 7055 3 50 TENTES Le SB 18 Concourse C F Use Live Announcement SA Roe At 64 19 Security Checkpoint Queing 1 calibrate Test oe z E 20 200 f7s0 68 20 Security Checkpoint os 8s 80 800K x 4K 8K 12 5K 20K 7 legged In Kema Co E fal 7A 21 Food Court 7B 22 Rental Car Area Bypass EQ selectedband i 2 3l4 sfel7 efe 8A 23 Parking Garage Type Center Freq Hz Gan dB Bandwidth Oct s 124 Test Zone Peaking 270K 1 50 gA 0 332 USER MANUAL wilo i B D VERSION 1 03 Innovative Electronic Designs Copyright 2013 Innovative Electronic Designs LLC All Rights Reserved If this document is distributed with software that includes an end user agreement this document as well as the software described in it is furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license Except as permitted by any such license no part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording storage in an information retrieval system or otherwise without the prior written permission of Innovative Electronic Designs LLC Please note that the content in this guide is protected under copyright law even if it is not distributed with software that includes an end user license agreement The
92. ENTERPRISE SOFTWARE SUITE 403 fete Re bes ik dk 71852 A Volume fo BA So ee roa ACS Specific Tasks Training Room ACS Titan System Detail View t G w 590 Server Z t Mics Zones y Training Room ACS Legacy System Training Room Legacy ACS System wide Tasks i Gateway Computer Y JUser Jason Kleiman Total 4 49s L 0 00s R 4 495 4 4 TM 540 Ambient Analysis fe Q E Q Ce Ep amp i Na ES O A Languages Takes FAS Variables Zone Groups Entry Code PDRP System Definitions Messages Settings f Channel Settings Training Room IPAU 10 2 131 125 20096 3 BUR ces naw Be TEFA a E F Ambient Analysis a a ESNS RESA I E ENS U AE ES AS Ane di Edit Vertor Heb EO Oper nie a a oe Model 6472 Coo o o o ee aal sonses 97 ETETE AN AAEE Channelout Mic S panies Amplifier Channel Amp Status Program Sensors Gain Calc Filter Limit Ambient Out Atten g Level Us a ECA a ARS tsva Threshold Saing East Gan Range Attenuation oP r n E Channel 18 OK i nmo aed 20 an a eS ees 11 Ticketing Area 8 Channel Out A anaa e 1 ig SF 28 12 Baggage Claim A Har G E E ee 16 ee Gener 4 Aten E Level ee B ieee en aa ER an 18 oes Gas fey ESA aeea 80 Constant 12 2 e ee 38 14 Upper Curbside gt f 6 d8spl Attack Release 30 Srtgps KAR 148 15 Lower Curbside p 12 70 12334 g zs 4 AA Ai
93. Fault 26 Channel 5B Ground Fault 27 Channel 6A Ground Fault 28 Channel 6B Ground Fault 29 Channel 7A Ground Fault 30 Channel 7B Ground Fault 31 Channel 8A Ground Fault 32 Channel 8B Ground Fault 33 Fan 1 Fault 34 Fan 2 Fault 35 Fan 3 Fault 36 Fan 4 Fault 1 Audio Controller ACS 10 Communication Channel Network 14 Backup CPU Failure 48 Relay Device Down reported by fault logger 100 Device Off line 110 PING Failure 564 Fault 564 Frame Number Subsystem environmental Subsystem Failure 2 5 Will TED Chapter 1G System Supervision Innovative Electronic Designs Type Name Fault Number Values Titan T9160 IPAU 240 Fault Status on DSP Core 241 Fault Status AIO Unit 1 242 Fault Status AIO Unit 2 243 Fault Status MTC Unit 1 244 Fault Status MTC Unit 2 245 Fault Status LVIO Unit 1 246 Fault Status LVIO Unit 2 Titan T90xxDSP NDU 240 Fault Status on DSP Core 241 Fault Status AIO Unit 1 242 Fault Status AIO Unit 2 243 Fault Status AIO Unit 3 244 Fault Status AIO Unit 4 245 Fault Status MTC Unit 1 Titan Frames 0 239 Warning Status on External Card at CAN Bus Address give by Fault Number 240 Warning Status on DSP Core 241 245 Warning Status on Internal Card at CAN Bus Address 15 Card Internal Fault give by Fault Number Titan T9160 IPAU 241 Warning Status AIO Unit 1 242
94. From File Ctrl I Expo emplate To File Chri E Save Template Chri 5 3 Delete Template Ctrl D Exit Figure 6 8 Import Template Menu 2 This will open a standard Windows Open dialog window as shown in Figure 6 9 x Organize 22 Views v New Folder Favorite Links Name Date modified T gt Size L Ti ECP_528_templ xml 5 12 2010 6 XML Document 4KB HH Desktop jm Computer E Documents J Pictures Music 3 Recently Changed I Searches dJ Public Folders A gt File name xmi files xm 7 Figure 6 9 Import Template Dialog 3 Select the appropriate tile location using the and tile system navigation tools located at the top of the window 4 Highlight the tile to import as shown in Figure 6 9 5 Click the Open button to load the template file The imported template will have the text IMPORTED appended to the tront of the template name as shown in Figure 6 10 Template Hame IMPORTED SDF Airport Figure 6 10 Imported Template Name 6 Rename the template if necessary and click the Save Template button located in the toolbar to save the imported template to the database 94 min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 6 528 Interface Designer Editing Templates A 528 mic station intertace consists of combinations of buttons and scroll boxes Each has their own specific properties as they relate to functionality and appearance The 528 Interface D
95. Gate Program Source Background Music Source Page Zone Channel 1B OK 2A 11 Ticketing Area 5 Audio Input 34 z 20 Local BGM 10 Gate c5 channel Out M na 12 Baggage Claim 4 Aten leva 13 Baggage Claim B 25 1 Duck Level 25 Duck Level 25 Zone State Idle SS ee 14 Upper Curbside _ 20 0 dB ui 15 Lower Curbside 4B 16 Concourse A 5A 17 Concourse B 5B 18 Concourse C 19 Security Checkpoint Queing 20 Security Checkpoint po 7A 21 Food Court 22 Rental Car Area M Mute I Mute M Mute 23 Parking Garage 8B 24 Test Zone 25 0 dB 73 0 gg EE w Ww Oo P 15 _ 20 0 dB ae Page Bus 0 EN T Page Priority 192 o o P oOo Ny re D Figure 2 6 Titan Channel Settings Window Inputs and Zone Manager The three sections of the Input and Zone Manager are described below Program Source e Program Source Drop list used to select the program source for the channel Program Source fs Audio Input 34 5 Audio Input 34 ie A F Audio Input 2 Audio Input 4 9 Audio Input 54 10 Audio Input 56 11 Audio Input 64 12 Audio Input 66 Figure 2 7 Program Source Selection e Volume Level Volume for the selected program source for the channel e Duck Level Amount in negative dB that this channel will be reduced when a page is made to the channel e Mute Checkbox used to mute the input Background Music Source
96. Local Zone Groups 1 Location pee ooo User Groups 1 All Call _ 2 All Call Emergency __ 3 Communication Center OK Cancel Figure 7 4 Zone Group Editor New Zone Group Add New Zone Group Note Note The steps necessary for adding a new zone group are as follows Refer to Zone Group Editor on page 116 for details on the Zone Group Editor window Click on the Zone Groups icon from the Enterprise Navigator window to open the Zone Group Viewer Click the Add button to open the Zone Group Editor Select the appropriate Zone Group Type trom the droplist box Enter an unused entry code for the new zone group Valid range s of numbers available for the selected zone group type will be listed in the pop up help when the cursor is placed over the entry code text box Type in a description of the zone group in the Location entry box Select the User Groups that will have permission to access this zone group Click the Destinations tab and select all system zones to be assigned to this zone group Holding the cursor over a zone will open the flyover help balloon containing the description of each zone Click the OK button to save the changes and close the window The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to discard changes and return to the viewer form min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 7 Zone Group Setup Edit Click the Edit button to open the
97. Location of DAX Files retrieved from ACS The temporary location of takes retrieved trom the ACS Typically this is either c ied or c temp e Delete retrieved DAX files on exit When checked takes retrieved from the ACS to the local computer will be deleted when the application shuts down Note This option is disabled tor the current released version of the software e Download take to dual CPUs where applicable Checking this option will download the take trom the local computer to both CPUs if dual CPUs exist on the local ACS when Save to ACS option is chosen trom the File menu e Take Plotting The DRP Editor is capable of opening large take files However graphing large tiles is time consuming and in most cases the need to see every single detail of a waveform is not necessary This option controls the detail level of the audio waveform Setting it to lower numbers 1 is the lowest allowed value will yield higher quality graphs at the expense of rendering speed Setting it to 50 or higher will increase the speed at which wavetorms are rendered but at a reduction in graph quality 177 Will TED Chapter II DRP Editor tative ete ctronte Destine Configuration Figure 1 1 26 Configuration Window Play Record Tab Play Record Tab e Local Audio Controllers This list box shows the Device ID Description and IP Address of the ACSs contigured in Enterprise Only one ACS can be selected trom the list to be the
98. Mic Station User trom the system The user is prompted for confirmation as shown in Figure 5 19 before the selected record is erased In addition to erasing one record at a time the user can choose to delete multiple records at a time as well Simply select multiple Mic Station Users by holding down the CTRL key and clicking on multiple records in the viewer and click on the Delete button trom the toolbar x are vou sure you want to delete selected recordisi G e i Mo Cancel 5 Figure 5 19 Delete Confirmation Dialog Box Delete a Mic Station User The steps necessary to delete an existing user are as follows 1 Highlight a user group in the Mic Station User Viewer window or select multiple users by holding down the CTRL key while clicking 2 Click the Delete button located on the toolbar 3 Click the Yes button to delete the selected user s The Cancel or No button can be clicked at any time to cancel the delete operation and return to the viewer form 87 7 Will TED Chapter 5 Mic Station Security Innovative Electronic Designs Print This option interfaces with the IED Print Manager software to open up the print preview window containing all the Mic Station User data Refer to the IED Print Manager section tor more intormation on this teature 88 528 Interface Designer The 528 series of digital microphone stations has a default user interface that provides access to the most common f
99. PAU Config Tool before the unit can be used in a system GREED Parameters with this tag should not be modified in the PAU Contig Tool and should be adjusted only trom the appropriate Enterprise screen CAD Parameters with this tag can be adjusted trom the PAU Contig Tool if needed but the setting may be overridden by Enterprise during the course of normal operation 47 Will TED Chapter 3 Titan IPAU Config Tool TT oee tectonic vests IPAU Config Tool Interface Each Titan trame used in a system must be contigured at a basic level outside of IED Enterprise before it can be used in a system This configuration is accomplished using the IPAUContigTool exe located in C IED Tools Titan folder on the system server computer The intertace consists of a menu bar buttons and other controls located at the top of the window There are tive 5 tabs that can be selected to configure different groups of parameters within the frame Each tab has a small LED style indicator to indicate the status of the information on the tab Examples of all three can be seen in Figure 3 1 e Yellow The data on the tab has been modified but the changes have not been sent to the frame e Bright Green The data displayed on the tab has been retrieved from the frame and matches the current trame settings e Dark Green The data has not been loaded from the frame to the tab Once the application has been started an IP address must be entered first to
100. Point Letter 0 3 for A D Bits 3 0 Point Number 0 15 for Points 1 16 Combine Fault Type and Fault Number into word then Bits 15 1 always High Bit Bits 14 12 Sequence Number 0 7 for seq 1 8 Bits 11 9 Test Setting Code 0 7 for code 1 8 Bits 8 0 Point Number 1 511 for Points 1 511 2 7 System Supervision This page has been intentionally left blank 278 VisDID Setup There are two configuration files that reside on each DDC computer that determine how each display attached to that computer will operate The VisDID xml tile is used to configure the overall setup of the attached displays The MessageList xml tile is used to detine the content that will be shown on each display when a visual announcement is not taking place The tollowing sections describe the contiguration properties available in each tile LAs EEn eee eee ee oa a On Oe I 280 SOMO hI Cts oe rest mece ee oie he hoki thoes ocGee alone eae e 280 UWA EREA ooh Hectic hel clan E te EE ere oa aa eas a et Se ie ae Serene 281 MessadeU T cca tesa reana aaa a s a a ERES 285 E P ee a a a aa aa 285 Maa e a aaa Paes ee ee eee eee beatae aa 285 2 9 Will TED Chapter 17 VisDIDSetup na VisDID xml 280 This tile is the main setup file tor VisDID Immediate and VisDID Continuous applications that run on the DDC Display Driver Computer It is typically located under C ied vis did VisDID xml The tile can be edited with any text editor but the struct
101. Print This button interfaces with the IED Print Manager software to open the print preview window containing the user group data Refer to the IED Print Manager section for more information on this feature 79 Will TED Chapter 5 Mic Station Security Innovative Electronic Designs Companies Companies are used in conjunction with mic station users that are assigned membership to Companies Companies are accessed by double clicking on the Companies icon as shown in Figure 5 8 in the Enterprise sottware atter highlighting selecting an announcement controller on the TreeView This brings up a viewer Figure 5 9 that lists all companies that are currently setup in the system Figure 5 8 Companies Icon A system is typically shipped with a tew detault companies e g IED Fire Department etc Steps to modity existing Companies or to add new ones are described in the appropriate sections below The toolbar at the top of the viewer provides the ability to add edit delete or print companies J Add Edit lt Delete i Print Companies _ Police Department i Security J T cas OK 5 Record s a Figure 5 9 Companies Viewer Add Click the Add button to open the Company editor with a blank torm as shown in Figure 5 10 Enter a descriptive name for the company here 80 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 5 Mic Station Security Compan Description Figure 5 10 C
102. R nee a f Ea ercther titan System wide Tasks mint E sj A ab et al 208 amp k G amp G amp General SM 1 47pm Ason G Ea amp we B Rem osP iev 0 Brau Gp 1ED2 cobr 05 W 9 bm amp E E Rob B ci 2 B Jeca Figure 8 1 Enterprise Navigator Window There are two windows involved for editing zones the Zones List Viewer and the Zone Editor Each of these windows is described in the sections that follow 120 min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Zones Viewer Chapter 8 Zone Setup Double click the Zones icon shown in Figure 8 1 to open the Zones Viewer Figure 8 2 This window provides a list of all zones programmed in the selected announcement controller This window provides access to edit or delete existing zones as well as add new ones A filter can be applied to simplify the list and make it easier to view a specific group of data Location d card d card d card d card d card d card d card d card titan titan titan titan titan D Card Zone D Card Zone D Card Zone D Card Zone D Card Zone D Card Zone D Card Zone D Card Zone Titan Digital Titan Digital Titan Digital Titan Digital Titan Digital Titan Digital Figure 8 2 Zones Viewer Output To Device BigReg Titan BigReg Titan BigReg Titan BigReg Titan BigReg Titan BigReg Titan OK 40 Record s ve Double click any zone in the
103. Scroll Box Item Permissions Each item has three options e Allow All User Permissions Select this option to give access to this item for all USErS e Allow Same User Permissions As Select this option to slave the permissions for an item to those of another button or item The other button or item to use as the master is selected from the adjacent droplist box e Allow Specific User Permissions Select this option to restrict access to this item only to the users selected in the window Check the box next to each user that should be allowed access Two shortcut buttons are to the right of the window Check All Clear All to allow quick selection or de selection of all items in the list Note Because of hardware limitations there is a limited number 31 of different Allow Specitic User Permissions available so it s recommended to use the Allow Same User Permissions As option as trequently as possible Preview The preview shows all items available tor a scroll box as it will look on a 528 mic station This is handy to use to test text length and font colors Clicking the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons allow viewing of all items in the list 103 Will TED Chapter 6 528 Interface Designer Innovative Electronic Designs Transfer Templates When a template is open it can be sent to one or more mic stations at any time Transfer a Template to a Mic Station 1 Open the template as described previously 2 Clic
104. Supervision was installed to trigger relays on faults then the Viewer will also show the number of relays that have been triggered due to fault conditions in the system Hovering the mouse over the Relays Triggered label will show the relays that are currently tripped as shown in Figure 16 4 26 Will TED Chapter 1G System Supervision Innovative Electronic Designs Automatically refresh current fault list Total Faults 2 Active Relay Zones Controller Fault Mic Station Fault Any System Fault Titan Amplifier Fault Figure 16 4 Relays That Are Currently Tripped Due To Fault Conditions 268 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 16 System Supervision Device Monitoring This icon brings up the window as shown in the example in Figure 16 5 that allows setting up how devices are to be monitored by the Service or if they are to be monitored at all The grid in Figure 16 5 shows three columns which are quite self explanatory The last column determines the technology to use to monitor the device selected in the grid Typically IED devices are monitored via EDnet an IED proprietary technology whereas non lED devices are monitored for network connectivity only via PING ICMP protocol packets One should make selections in this grid appropriate to the types of devices and the supervision requirements needs of the system Devoe Monmtoring Setup O x Deviews that are to be monitored for faults by the
105. System Supervision Service Description Monitor Poll Type 590 Remote Client 575 590 Server AA e a A ACS SLOP z ledMet Crestron CPU e ing Gateway Corde T E p TEST 588 et A C A O O tet Titan IPAM T9160 587 oe e O O OO Figure 16 5 Sample Device Monitoring Setup Window 269 Will TED Chapter 1G System Supervision Innovative Electronic Designs Fault Descriptions This window allows one to override the auto generated fault descriptions produced by System Supervision sottware The droplist control can be used to select the device whose tault descriptions are to be overridden EY Fault Descriptions Setup Fault Descriptions for Device Universal Power Supply 534 Figure 16 6 Sample Fault Description Window The grid underneath the droplist is where fault descriptions are associated with a fault type and number pair This is shown in Figure 16 6 Setting up fault descriptions requires an understanding of the system as a whole and the IED fault numbering system used A list of fault types and fault numbers is included at the end of this document or one may use the details that appear in the Fault View pop up The actions available in the grid on this window are e Add New Fault Description Type into the blank line at the bottom of the grid e Edit a Fault Description Simply click on the cell to edit Fault Type Fault Number or Description and edit
106. Take Destination Select the zones you would like this PDRP message to play out to Training Room Titan ACS Training Room Legacy ACS 0 PT Load Zonemap zone Groups EE a 10 All Call 12 28 10 All Call 15 T CAS Bulletin Board 13 21 29 20 Terminal B 14 22 30 00 Concourse 4 101 Gate Al le AAS 102 Gate 42 103 Ticket 4rea 16 24 Wim TED Innovative Electronic Designs Load Zonemap 4 Previous P Next Play Figure 9 21 Load Zonemap Click the Load Zonemap button to use zones previously defined in the Zone Groups setup A new window will appear Figure 9 21 and a zone mop is selected using the droplist box OK Click the OK button to load the selected zone map to this PDRP message Any previous zone selections are discarded and the zone selections associated with this zone map are applied to the PDRP message Cancel Click the Cancel button to exit the window without loading the zone map definitions 148 Takes Takes are the fundamental element used for creating PDRP messages and FAS announcements in the system All PDRP messages are made up of one or more takes Takes must first be added to the system and then they are available tor use in the PDRP Messages section of the application The following sections provide detail on managing takes stored in a system For information on editing the audio of an individual take refer to the DRP Editor section of the manual OU AS p
107. Titan j 1i titan Titan Digital BigRteg Titan j 12 titan Titan Digital BigReg Titan LJ 13 titan Titan Digital BigReg Titan 14 titan Titan Digital BigRteg Titan OF 40 Record s A Figure 10 3 Takes Viewer Toolbar The toolbar located at the top of the Viewer provides quick access to the commands needed to add edit or delete takes 15 Will TED Chapter 10 Takes Innovative Electronic Designs Add Click the Add button to open the Editor with a new take entry as shown in Figure 10 4 Editor xl System wide Take Record Play Take VIS Take Number J Language Jen English US Take Type Gender fi Airline Female Duration Seconds I This is a generic take Take Text Figure 10 4 Take Editor New Take Add New Take The steps necessary to add a new take to the system are as follows Note Refer to the Take Editor on Take Editor on page 156 for details on the Take Editor window Click on the Takes icon trom the Enterprise Navigator window to open the Viewer Click the Add button to open the Editor window Enter a new unused take number in the Take Number field Select the appropriate language for this take trom the Language droplist box Select the appropriate take type trom the Take Type droplist box Select either Male or Female gender from the Gender droplist box Type in the text for the message in the Take Text entry box Go to the Record Pl
108. Window The Auto Test Configuration window is broken down into the following specific areas of information each of which is discussed in more detail below e The Title Bar is the blue area at the very top of the window which contains general information pertaining to the whole window e The Menu and Tool Bars are immediately below the Title Bar and provide access to the various tunctionality of the Auto Test Contiguration window e The Point Selection Grid is the large section in the center of the window in which lists points and their deviations e On the right near the bottom of the window are the OK and Cancel buttons e The Status Bar is the grey bar at the bottom of the window and provides a variety of status information iil JED trnovative Elestrents pertgns Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto Test Configuration Title Bar In addition to the window name the title bar at the top of the Auto Test Configuration window displays the following information about the amplifier frame which runs the tests being edited in this window e The frame s description e The frame s IP address e Anumeric identifier for the frame This number is often called the 124 device handle It is unique to the system and is used by some low level tools to identity the frame Menu Tool Bars The Menu and Tool bars provide quick access to the various teatures of the Auto Test Contiguration window The following list details these features File Login Lo
109. a being calibrated needs to be at least 15dB below the sensor threshold level setting during calibration in order to yield a valid calibration Haia Calibration Take ross 4 450 F Use Live Announcement dEspl 63 Stopped Valid Calibration Figure 2 19 Valid Calibration Once a calibration has been completed the status bar will display as shown in Figure 2 19 it the calibration process produced valid results Test The Test button will play the calibration take to the selected channel This is used atter the calibration process is complete to see it the system correctly differentiates between program and ambient noise When the test take is playing and the calibration has been successtul the level should not change If the system turns up or down during the test playback then either the either the calibration constant should be adjusted or a re calibration should be attempted 33 Will TED Delay The delay object provides the ability to delay the signal up to 2 seconds in 1 millisecond ms intervals This area consists of a slider and edit box and a bypass button This object is used to delay the signal for individual channels in designs where loudspeakers are positioned at varying distances from the listener Using proper delay settings the system designer can adjust the timing of the signal so that the sound will arrive at the listener at the same time trom ditterent loudspeakers thus preventing destructive interf
110. aNet device handle transmitter and receiver information to the frame the next time data is sent This information is calculated and based off of the intormation entered in the Group and Frame tields These should be set to match the data in the Enterprise treeview when setting up new trame CGAL Vinimum Test Set Threshold This is used tor the automatic audio testing of the IPAU trame When a system set is performed to calibrate the supervision system the values read during the calibration process must be above this threshold to be used as valid set data CAL Current Date Time in Frame This field displays the date and time as it is currently set in the frame It is used to see if there is a discrepancy between the actual date time and the date time set in the frame CZ Set Date and Time w Data When checked a date and time update will be pertormed when data is sent to the trame using the Send Data button Caution It is critical that the date and time be set correctly in the frame The date and time in the trame is used to run scheduled tests and as a stamp when reporting system faults PROM and FLASH versions These fields display the version and date information PROM and Flash firmware that resides in the frame 52 min JED innovative Eleetronte Designs 00000 Chapter 3 Titan IPAU Contig Tool Network Tab This tab is used to configure the network address properties for all three network ports on the IPAU frame G
111. able Monitoring When checked the message can be monitored through a test zone Partial Activation When checked this message will be allowed to play when other announcements are already active in some ot its detined zones The message will play in the zones that are available When not checked the system will wait for all zones to be available before playing the message 137 Will TED Chapter 9 PDRP Messages S oeae etcctrontc vests Priority This determines the behavior of this message in relation to other messages or announcements in the system Higher priority messages or announcements will take over zones from those set with a lower priority A local priority announcement will override a terminal priority announcement only in the local priority announcement zones Figure 9 10 shows the drop list for the available selections in the default system configuration PDRP Editor Figure 9 10 General Tab Priority Drop List Language User Groups Tab PDRP Editor Q O 2 All Call Emergency 3 American Airlines C 4 Delta Air Lines CIMA Chinese C EN English US C FR French C SP Spanish Figure 9 11 PDRP Editor Languages amp User Groups Tab 138 Win JED Kenovative Elestrents vestens 0000 Chapter 9 PDRP Messages User groups This list of check boxes determines who is allowed to activate this message trom a mic station When logins are not required at mic stations at least o
112. ade in that begins at the lett selection cursor and ends at the right selection cursor The selection will linearly increase in volume trom silence to full level It is recommended that a short face in be placed at the beginning of all recorded takes to prevent any unwanted pops Fade Out This option will tade the audio out beginning at the lett selection cursor and ending at the right selection cursor The selection will linearly decrease in volume trom the tull level to silence It is recommended a short tade out be placed at the end ot all recorded takes to prevent any unwanted pops Volume Up This option increases the amplitude of the selected region by the percentage entered in the Volume field located on the toolbar Figure 1 1 20 In the example below selecting the Volume Up option will increase the amplitude of the selected region by 8 mm Sal HE E volume fel t of NF ial et Figure 11 20 Volume 173 Will TED Chapter II DRP Editor tative etcetera Destane Volume Down This option decreases the amplitude of a selected region by the percentage entered in the Volume field located on the toolbar Figure 11 20 In the example above selecting the Volume Down option will decrease the amplitude of the audio level of the selected region by 8 Clear Select this option to reduce the selected range to zero thus placing silence in the selected range This removes the audio data without altering the len
113. akes Language Select the language for the take This setting does not attect the audio or text of the take It is used to categorize the take so it can be found correctly with other takes of the same language Note When recording a take in multiple languages the same take number should be used tor each language The system will store the takes in the appropriate language folder Take Type This assigns a quick reterence group to the take Takes are categorized by their general purpose and are filtered by this setting trom the Viewer Figure 10 10 shows the list of take types available in the system 1 Airline 3 Airline Freq Flyer Prog 2 Airline Slogan 13 Airport Welcome 28 Baggage Check 30 Baggage Claim 11 Baggage Delay Reason 12 Card Color 4 Cites 16 Clock Indicator 6 Compensation 20 Curbside Parking 22 Emergency 17 Flight Announcement phrase 7 Miscellaneous Audio 21 Moving Walkway 19 No Smoking 8 Number 23 Photo ID 24 Pre Announce Chime 29 Security Checkpoint 15 Time of Day 32 Train Emergency 31 Train Miscelleanous Audio 33 Train Unattended Luggage 25 Trainline 27 Trainline Cities 26 Trainline Slogan 18 Unattended Luggage Figure 10 10 Take Types Gender Takes are identified as either male or female voice for reference Duration This is the length in seconds of the take It is used to calculate the correct timing information when the take wi
114. al C 16 Northwest Airlines C 17 Korean Airlines 18 WestJet C 19 Air Canada C 20 Air Pacific 21 Japan Airlines 22 Air Japan v 4 Previous p Next Figure 4 6 Permission amp User Settings Tab User Language This setting determines the language used for the mic station user interface This setting is overridden when the lock feature is turned on However the language used for the Login screen will still be set based on this setting Graphic Permission This is a hexadecimal code that determines the button permissions of the mic station The value in this field is managed by the 528 Interface Designer when creating custom buttons and scroll boxes that differ from the standard configuration When the mic station is locked permissions are based on user login and this field is grayed out and cannot be edited Caution This setting should not be modified manually unless directed to do so by an IED Technical Support representative 67 Will TED Chapter 4 Microphone Station Setup toate electronic Pestans User Groups This setting allows user groups to be assigned to the mic station when it is not locked User groups are assigned to the station by checking the box next to the user group name Zone groups and PDRP messages are also assigned to user groups When a mic station is associated with one or more User Groups then it will have access to any announcements that are also assigned to that u
115. all channels set to 20 Local BGM as the BGM source The Gain parameter is used to adjust the overall level of the Local BGM This property has a range from 60dB of attenuation to 27 5dB of gain It is normally set to OdB GAL Channel BGM inputs Select the BGM channel to use for each individual channel GA ci All To Local BGM Click this button to set all channels to 20 Local BGM as the BGM source 60 Microphone Station Setup The following sections provide intormation on contiguring microphone stations Additional intormation related to the configuration of mic stations can be found in Tutorial C Adding and Configuring Mic Stations and the section on Mic Station Security located in this manual Me SOM Olt ot stot olatnrs cies a a ae a a a e aA EAE 62 Mic tation Viewer se eee seeren e O n E Eai 63 NAIC SICHIOM BCNION eases S ae OaE eh ah eh AS 65 General Tab ric ode ccawd saw aig swieeioeaueneewsedaweneieecwoeeeean 65 Permission amp User Settings Tab ni bees te db tte le betes Cleat ted ot 67 Groups Companies amp Gates Tab 2 cece eee eee eee eee eee 68 Key amp Button Assignments Tab wi 5 2262 bona shies th ote aces 69 Sidekick Properties Tab 23 gt acta tautiieecee uur fbi 6 Aken leis Stee 72 Additonal Properties TaD saesae du dana a r Sate ona Sacties 73 6l Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 4 Microphone Station Setup Mic Stations Mic stations are detined tor each announcement cont
116. alog box with the application version number The F1 key can be used as a shortcut to pertorm this tunction Toolbar Buttons and Controls E e ey Sa IP Address 10 20 10 11 Set Date M Perm Reset Fit Sft Reset Petry Ott RF Reload Data after Set Reset Figure 3 2 Toolbar Buttons and Controls GD ct Date Click this button to set the date and time in the Titan frame to match the computer s clock CIEI V Perm Make Permanent Click this button to save the settings in the frame Changes are not permanently stored in the frame until this button is pressed Once stored permanently these will be the new default settings for the frame when it is powered up or reset The F6 key can be used as a shortcut to perform this function GAL Reset Flt Reset Fault Click this button to reset the fault warning flag in the frame This will turn off the fault indicator light on the front of the frame until a new fault has been detected The F7 key can be used as a shortcut to perform this function GALD 5ft Reset Soft Reset Click this button to send a reset command to the frame over the network The F8 key can be used as a shortcut to perform this function CZD ciry Dflt Factory Default Click this button to return the frame to factory default settings CEL P Address This is the IP address of the frame to be configured by the Titan IPAU Config Tool If the IP address is changed on the Network Tab it will need to be chang
117. ame Options The features in this window are Frames List Box This is a list of all announcement controllers that are currently detined in Time Talker Name This is a text entry box used to define a name for this frame e g Terminal A 189 Will TED Chapter 12 Time Talker Innovative Electronic Designs IP Address Primary This is the IP address for the announcement controller This field must be defined to allow Time Talker to communicate with an announcement controller IP Address Backup This is the IP address for the backup announcement controller CPU if installed This field should be left blank for systems that do not have redundant processors OK Click this button to save the frame additions or deletions and close the window Cancel Click this button to discard any changes and close the window Zone Map Setup Zone Maps in Time Talker correspond to Zone Groups that are defined in Enterprise The zone groups to receive time announcements must be entered into Time Talker using the Zone Map Setup dialog box that is accessed from the Edit menu First the zone group number must be determined by looking at the Zone Groups Setup section in Enterprise Then the group number is entered in the Zone Number field with a description typed into the Description field Click the Add Zone Map to Time Talker button to add the zone group to Time Talker ioj xi Time Talker Zone Maps Number Description 300 Co
118. amnccue icecteus nemcousceuance tases 48 Toolbar Buttons and Controls _ 49 General Tab 0082 ieee lio 51 Network Tab 25 65 5225 0568 ie cet tote cee on 53 Zone Attn amp Backup Tab 55 Mute amp Bypass Tab 2222 22 2 57 BGM Vdc ce ccdu ee et beast EELA eens 59 Microphone Station Setup 61 Mic Stations 2 2 2 22ee cece cece eee eeeeee 62 Mic Station Viewer _ 2 2 e e 63 Mic Station Editor 0 0 2 cece ee ee ee ee 65 Goneril TaD cain the ated eet A 65 Permission amp User Settings Tab 67 Groups Companies amp Gates Tab 68 Key amp Button Assignments Tab 69 Sidekick Properties Tab 22222 22 eee eee eee 72 Additional Properties Tab 73 Mic Station Security 75 User Groups 222 2c ie cbetOtin checusth e i ae 76 COMPONIOS 225 icsas eee e ence cages 80 Mic Station Users 2 22 2 2 0 eeee 84 528 Interface Designer 89 Launching the 528 Interface Designer 90 Templates ee ocecktsesute cle ke a discscauateudla 9 Opening Adding Renaming and Deleting 9 Importing and Exporting Templates 92 Editing Templates 22 2 0 95 FOOD lt td 222 22 stents te ets Jou ene tee ats 95 DUNONS exten cnet cuatecedtescaeeut Goenewntantsee 98 litte BUROM BOL parsemer Oo aol eek ete 98 BUtiOn PrOp
119. anguage xf General Languages User Groups Play Schedule Assemble Take Destination EN English US Assembled PDRP Message Assemble 9991 1 second silence 7297 Smoking is permitted in designated areas only Please refrain from smoking while walking throughout the building Play OK Cancel Figure 9 16 PDRP Editor Assemble Take Tab The controls on this tab are as follows 142 min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter Q PDRP Messages Language tabs An individual tab will be displayed for each language as selected in the Languages amp User Groups tab Each language has its own assembly that must be defined for the message to play back correctly in multiple languages Assembled PDRP Message area This area displays the message as it has been assembled for playback for the language tab selected Each take is displayed with the take number in green text surrounded by followed by the actual text of the take Assemble button Click the Assemble button to open the Assemble Takes Editor as shown in Figure 9 17 Assemble Takes Editor This window is used to put together individual takes to create the final PDRP message It opens as a result of clicking the Assemble button on the Assemble Take tab from the PDRP Message Editor Assemble Takes C Insert Take Append Take Replace Take Filter By Take Number Description Take Types gt _ 1001 United Airlines F 1 7 _
120. aoaaa aoaaa aaa 143 Destination Tab cs os Sc Se cine eekly cecp has Seana dco tide i ithe 146 129 Will TED Chapter Q PDRP Messages Innovative Electronic Designs PDRP Messages 130 PDRP Messages offer a wide range of possibilities in providing automated message playback in a facility PDRP Messages are sometimes referred to as assembled messages because the are created by cascading a series of message segments known as takes together to create the final message A single take can be the full message or only a part of a message For example the message text below is an example of a situation where a single take would encompass the entire message Passengers are reminded that they may carry on two pieces of luggage If you have more than two pieces of luggage which are oversized the agent will be happy to check your luggage for n you The system stores this take as a single file and it is indexed with a unique take number In this example the take number is 8210 and it can be played completely using only that take The next example uses multiple takes to form a complete message Welcome to Abilene Municipal Airport For the health and comfort of the traveling public all terminals are smoke free Smoking is permitted at designated curbside areas only Thank you This example consists of three individual takes that have been assembled together in the PDRP Editor to play as a single message Here are the individual tak
121. artup Options Manual Login Required for Restricted Areas Windows User Name Automatically Logged In Login Options Minimum Password Length p T Login Lock Enable Number of Attempts oO al Lock Time Seconds fo Automatic Logout Options M Enabled Auto Logout Time minutes 30 Cancel Figure 13 8 Security Server Parameters Options Tab Startup Options e Manual Login Required for Restricted Areas When selected users must always enter a user name and password each time the application is started e Windows User Name Automatically logged in When selected the user will be logged into the system using the same login credentials used tor the Windows login This requires the same username and password to be entered in the Password Manager Note Manual login is recommended on operational systems Login Options e Minimum Password Length Enter the minimum length for user passwords The allowable range is to 10 characters e Login Lock Enable The purpose of this feature is to prevent rapid repeated attempts to log in under the conditions set by the next two entries It the box is checked the feature is active 200 min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 13 Password Management e Number of Attempts This specifies how many unsuccessful login attempts in a row are tolerated before invoking the Lock Time The valid range for this setting is between and 10 tailed login attemp
122. atus bar shows the current user name database connection status frame connection status and the activity status of the channel Amp Status The Amp Status section contains two indicators to display information related to the health of that channel Channel Settings Training Room IPAU 10 2 131 125 R0096 E lol x Amplifier Channel Inputs and Zone Manager Anp Stas 14 9 Gate C4 Model 6472 Program Source Background Music Source Page Zone E Channel 1B OK 2A 11 Ticketing Area 5 Audio Input 34 gt 20 Local BGM gt 10 Gate c5 Channel Out 2B 12 Baggage Claim A Atten E Level 3A 13 Baggage Claim B 25 1 Duck Level 25 Duck Level Zone State Idle a 44 15 Lower Curbside JE 12 Page Priority 192 4B 16 Concourse 4 18 5A 17 Concourse B ms 24 J 5B 18 Concourse C 30 J 6A 19 Security Checkpoint Queing 36 J 6B 20 Security Checkpoint 49 E 74 21 Food Court 48 J 7B 22 Rental Car Area Iv Mute I Mute 54 84 23 Parking Garage JE 60 i 8B 24 Test Zone 25 0 d 730 Logged In harti G e Figure 2 4 Titan Channel Settings Amplifier Status 19 Will TED Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Innovative Electronic Designs Card Status The top indicator is the status of the amplifier card for the currently selected channel The model number of the card is displayed immediately below the status
123. ay Take tab Select the mic station that will be used to record the take from the Use Mic Station droplist box ee ee SS 10 Click the Record button A window with the take text will appear and the mic station will indicate that it is ready to record 11 Press the mic switch on the station and record the message as it appears in the take text window 152 iin JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 10 Takes 12 To listen to the take select the appropriate monitor zone group trom the Play to Zone Group droplist box 13 Click the Play button to play the take to the selected zone group 14 Click the Edit Take button to open the DRP Editor and edit the take if needed Refer to the documentation on the DRP Editor for instructions on take editing 15 Once editing is complete make note of the length in seconds of the new take and close the DRP Editor 16 It this is a multi ACS system click the Send button to distribute the take file to all systems 17 Enter the length of the message in the Duration entry box on the System wide Take Tab 18 lf the system uses visual paging displays go to the VIS tab and click the Create VIS button 19 Click the OK button to save the changes and close the window Note The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to discard changes and return to the viewer form Edit Click the Edit button to open the editor window for the take highlighted in the viewer Alternatively double cli
124. b This tab is used for custom system configurations and is rarely used This tab should not be edited unless directed to do so by IED Technical Support xf General Zone Type Specific Additional Properties _ Add Property _ Edit Selected X Delete Selected Instance value 4 Previous P Next OK Cancel Figure 8 11 Additional Properties 128 PDRP Messages Permanent Digital Record Playback PDRP Messages are announcements consisting of pre recorded message segments reterred to as Takes These takes are stored identitied indexed and may be assembled together into coherent messages as needed A take can bea sound a word phrase or even a complete message This section describes the process of taking individual takes and putting them together to torm usable messages that can be triggered trom microphone stations external sources or play on a schedule The actual process of recording and editing takes is covered in the DRP Editor section of the manual AD eA Fesso1e 0 he RO ne RUE a Ee oe Sew Bee TTA EPL CTI A 130 PRE Messag s Viewer 5 00 ch20Gs chcete tenet o a E N E a 32 PDIP SECU 25 sacs c comb EAEN EEE orci EEA AA 136 Genera NO 445 ahr Reta saa Bo eee Ital ok ae 137 Language User Groups Tab oa nsec asleep eet 138 Play schedule ToD rerea e a E O E E EEA AARS 139 SCHOO E de tose E A E dd rate E A EE 140 Assemble Take Tab asec ce 2k se a aa d 142 Assemble Takes Editor 2 000 0000 aaa aaa aoaaa oaaao
125. bient Out Chan 26 Amp Input z 4 oon ce rl Not selected For test Logged In jstokes G eB lt a Figure 15 2 Auto Tests Window The Auto Tests window is broken down into the following specific areas of information each of which is discussed in more detail below Title Bar The Title Bar is the blue area at the very top of the window and contains general information pertaining to the entire window Menu and Tool Bars The Menu and Tool Bars are immediately below the Title Bar and provide access to the various tunctionality of the Auto Tests window Test Results Grid The Test Results Grid is the large section in the center of the window and contains information regarding the frame s Auto Test results Status Bar The Status Bar is the grey bar at the bottom of the window and provides a variety of status information 239 Will TED Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto Test Configuration _tmevative Electronic pestons Title Bar In addition to the window name the title bar at the top of the Auto Tests window displays the following information about the amplifier frame being controlled by this window e The frame s description e The frame s IP address e Anumeric identifier for the frame This number is often called the 124 device handle It is unique to the system and is used by some low level tools to identity the frame Menu and Tool Bars The Menu and Tool bars provide quick access to the various tunctions of the
126. borders which are slightly thicker and darker A clock symbol in this column header indicates that the test is scheduled to run automatically See the Edit Test Schedules window for more information lt Frequency gt second header row of columns three and greater Each defined test signal has its own column header labeled with the tone s frequency which spans three Test Results columns Set Test and Dev For each Frequency column header the same three result columns are repeated so that the three values in these columns may be shown for each frequency For example in Figure 15 9 each of the frequency columns 400Hz 1KHz and 20kHz span three columns Set Test and Dev In essence this means that each point may be tested for each frequency within a given test Dev and Dev third row of columns three and greater These three column headers each relate to the data in the point selection grid The following list discusses these columns in detail e The checkboxes in the first column indicate whether or not the point tor the row of each checkbox is selected to be tested at the frequency of the test for the column of the checkbox Checked means the point is selected for testing For example in Figure 15 7 the point labeled 6 Chan 1A Amp Input is selected to be tested tor the 400Hz frequency but not at the 1KHz frequency of the System test To select a point place a check in the checkbox by either clicking on the checkbo
127. c Designs LLC 9701 Taylorsville Road Louisville KY 40299 United States of America www iedaudio com 286 Will TED Innovat ive Electronic Desi gns IEK Communications Group Chapter 17 VisDID Setup 287 VisDID Setup This page has been intentionally left blank 288
128. cacst nto at bate kate a asaeauss 15 Take Editor 2 2 2 2 eee eee eee eee eee ee ee 156 System wide Take Tab 22 156 Record Play Take Tab su se0t bane d ene ie ote 158 NWS ToD a rentan ce ste an er ae ee ms lgcnte ads 159 DRP Editor 161 DRP Recording scccccs eet ceteme sete riered 162 Audio File Fonnais meuna os 2 oli te aa 162 Recommended Recording Practices 162 Launching the DRP Editor 163 Main Window Overview 165 Menus ee cece cececeeecececeeees 166 PUI VICIOUS eet tlati a ae ote oo Pewee 166 Edi Menu cet cece Soc aa tie teste 2 ear ost fcc 7A VIEW IMGNW E EE los wee 174 MOC ISSR se cadet city dh Dania Scag tk prcecn aes OEE 176 FEDME spota s A eater Mit at open eae atest 180 Toolbar eenaa Saou sti ieee teen uaee 18 Time Talker 185 Launching Time Talker 2 2 2 02 186 Time Talker Configuration Window 187 FleMenU ee 2 eet ic cane hast cata Sate tare al ae an ds 187 ECL ASI hes So so 9 a ates at cole Ld al Sauces 188 FICO IMICMU obo oo Reece te Gal GE met Gini da 188 Time Talker Setup 02020222 eee eee 189 Fame Opon t aceucdoteta tivoaiow Ute sie e 189 Zone IGS SEIU Diese wat 8 dom ele Aa ASS ee 190 Sei DIONS 22 005 2c sete eR ee hs hare 19 Time Events 6 222d 2 tuto tac S setae eed Sole 193 Deine EV GMt Siete tee te a 193 Password Management 195 Accessing Passwor
129. cal BGM Figure 3 7 BGM Tab The controls on this tab are as follows Reload Data Click this button to retrieve the data from the frame necessary to populate all fields on this tab Send Data Click this button to send the data on the tab to the frame CGAL Standard ACS BGM Click this button to quickly set the routing to receive the BGM channel from the default standard ACS BGM network channel GAL Fame Defaults Click this button to set the BGM routing to the defaults stored in the firmware CGA Cobranet Settings For non standard BGM routing schemes the CobraNet Receiver should be set to the receiver whose bundle number matches the bundle number of the CobraNet transmitter used to transmit the BGM channel over the network The CobraNet Channel should be set to match the settings of the device used to transmit the BGM channel over the network In most cases this will be the 510N card in the ACS and is configured in the BGM INI file on the 510CPU or 520CPU 97 Will TED Chapter 3 Titan IPAU Config Tool annie tectonic Pesians GAL Route BGM audio To Bus This selects the internal audio bus that will receive the BGM audio signal trom CobraNet The bus selected here can then be selected for each channel as the BGM source or as the source for the Local BGM bus CAL ocal BGM Select the input channel or internal audio bus to use for the Local BGM source in the frame This is what will be used for
130. cking on a take in the viewer will also open the editor q Previous gt Next OK Cancel Figure 10 5 Next Previous Buttons Editing an existing take opens the editor window with two additional buttons as shown in Figure 10 5 Clicking on the Previous and Next buttons allows quick navigation to the previous and next records in the viewer Navigating to a new record via the Next and Previous buttons atter making changes to the data in the editor will result in a contirmation prompt as shown in Figure 10 6 The prompt options are as follows e Yes Save current changes before navigating away e No Do not save changes before navigating away e Yes to All Save current and all subsequent changes while navigating using the Previous and Next buttons without any additional prompts x Data has changed Do you want to save current data before moving to another one a ho Yes to all Figure 10 6 Edit Contirmation Dialog Box Edit a Take The steps necessary to edit an existing take are as follows 153 Will TED Chapter 10 Takes Innovative Electronic Designs 154 Note Reterto Take Editor on page 156 for details on the Take Editor window Click on the Takes icon trom the Enterprise Navigator window to open the Viewer Select the appropriate filter type in the Filter By drop down menu Highlight a Take in the Viewer Click the Edit button or double click on the highlighted take to open the Editor Ma
131. configuration settings for all devices within the selected tree branch and cannot be undone Reload Data This button will instruct the application to reload the data from the database It is useful if other users may be logged into the system at other client workstations Selecting this will ensure that the data displayed is current Will TED Chapter l Overview Innovative Electronic Designs Tree View The Tree View provides a hierarchal view of the components that make up the overall system controlled by the application The Tree View is very similar to a file folder structure as seen in Microsoft Windows Explorer and is navigated in a similar fashion Fi 2 Training Room ACS Titan Syste Parent Object Training Room Tikan 405 ii Mic Stations ACS SION Card Training Room 903205 es Gateway Computer a 596 Monitor Test Frame Groups Child Objects We Hunters Fac e Test 2008 Server j oy Training Room ACS Legacy System Collapsible Branch p eo ann gacy Sy 590 Server Training Room Legacy ACS Expandable Branch e Gateway Computer M 540 Ambient Analysis Figure 1 22 Tree View Figure 1 22 illustrates a typical system configuration and the different elements of the Tree View The hierarchal structure allows individual system components to be grouped together based on how they relate to one another in the overall system architecture Some objects function as
132. constant of 1 4 With this setting a 1 4dB increase in ambient sensor level will result in a 1dB increase in output level up to the point where the Limit has been reached Calibration Constant This value is calculated and automatically entered during the channel calibration process It can be manually adjusted by typing in a new value in the edit box or by clicking the up down arrow buttons on the right of the box Caution This value should only be manually adjusted after an automatic calibration has not been completely successful Adjustments should be made in very small increments of 2or3 dB ata time Use the following guidelines when adjusting the calibration constant if the system is not properly responding atter an automatic calibration e It the system turns down as soon as an announcement is active then the calibration constant is too high It should be reduced in small increments until the system remains stable while an announcement is active e Ifthe system gets louder as while an announcement is active then the calibration constant is too low It should be increased in small increments until the system remains stable while an announcement is active Filter Attack This value determines the rate at which the output level will increase when an increase in the ambient sensor level has been received The value is in the number of seconds and can be directly entered in the box using the keyboard or adjusted using the arrow
133. course 4 10 10 90 I E mA me se Slow F _ m 5A 17 Concourse B Calibration op 5B 18 Concourse C 20 80 Constant x HEr l l z fee pal e dBspl Attack Release 30 64 19 Security Checkpoint Queing 36 70 F 6B 20 Security Checkpoint 2 L Za fi23 34 B Basis 24s ma E Ex ae en EE 74 21 Food Court j 3 ag S 40 60 Yona Calibration Take ross A 50 7B 22 Rental Car Area f 50 Eg n e E 8A 23 Parking Garage 50 sq Use Live Announcement 60 60 ae NA 96 8 des 50 1 desp ea Calibrate Test 20 0 dB 20 0 dp 750 Logged In jkleiman G A tu Figure 2 11 Ambient Analysis Attenuation Mode Each channel can be set to one of three different possible attenuation modes as described below Fixed This mode deactivates the ambient noise compensation for this channel The channel output level will remain at the level set by the Channel Out attenuator Attenuation Mode Fixed Automatico Slave To None Figure 2 12 Fixed Attenuation Mode Automatic This mode will allow the level of the channel to automatically adjust based on the ambient noise level as detected by the ambient sensor input The level will increase above the Channel Out attenuator setting as higher ambient noise levels are detected by the ambient noise sensor The level will increase by an amount proportional to the detected level as determined by the Scaling Constant The maxi
134. ctivated pulsate or pulse only once when it is triggered by a new fault condition 4 Optionally check the Reverse polarity checkbox When not checked relays are active high and inactive low Checking this option reverses the logic 5 Set up tault triggers tor this relay via the Trigger droplist See below Relay Setup i r G x ber 5E 583 i i i Test ALA Frame O F Relay is triggered by fault conditions 3 Mic Station Fault Description any System Fauk E Arny System Fault Anatoni Er Latch 4 Titan Arnplifer Fault Reverse polarity Le Active Low Inactive High 5 Ary System Fault Trigger ei System Faulks 6 Monitor Test Fault 7 Unassigned a Unassigned 3 Urassagmed 10 Unassgred Relay will be activated when ANY system Fault occurs and deactivated when there are no more system faults il Unassigned 17 Unassigned 17 Unassigned i4 Unassigned Figure 16 7 Relay Setup Window 2 1 Mil TED Chapter 1G System Supervision Innovative Electronic Designs The Trigger droplist can be used to associate the types of fault condition that will trip each relay Making a droplist selection brings up additional edit controls such as grids and a list of checkboxes The options tor the Trigger droplist are e All System Faults see Figure 16 7 Trip the relay on any fault in the system This would be a general tault relay e Faults from Selected Devices
135. d Configuration Options 196 Login LOGON sex o ce seer ee ies A 198 Application Management 199 Configure Server 2222 220222 20 ee 200 Ophion VAD Sects cpege hes alate aie she 200 HOG UGE TOG sash tb etih alate ee Dal th ee 201 Change Password 2eeeeeeee 203 Edit Accounts 0c cece cee cece cc nccccecnce 204 Menus eae ee ee Ee SNE BOE ED 2222222222 204 User ACCOUN S oaaao cet irene as aa aa a222 22222 205 Application Areas aio cu een Was ue eee t fee 209 596 Series Test Configuration 213 Gateway Monitor Test Setup 214 Configure Monitor Points 215 Test Results 0 ccc cece cc ccc cece ccc ceecece 218 ACS Output Test Results Tab 218 External Test Results oc 226 222 oc cucee bs ce annu 219 Mic Test Results 26 irs tate AG ets te ets 220 Monitor Zone _ cece cece cc ccccccccccccccee 222 Monitor Mics cece c ccc cece ceecccceccee 224 Gateway Configuration 226 Monitor Test ccc cece ccccccccccccceccccee 227 GeneralTab Sno s 2 hed na Bett Ree sled 227 Audible Zones Tab tia 2 fot taut i heen leds Bos 228 Mic Test Zone Tab eee eee eee eee 229 See ee ane peace ee 229 TestTab seat et caa sesh hones cbse cece ava wsk ates Se Shiatha eae wet ek 230 Auto Tests Window 234 Title Bar eta ay ese pace to an on
136. data The right selection cursor is unchanged Move Right Cursor to End of File This option moves the right selection cursor to the end of the audio data The lett selection cursor is unchanged Move Both Cursors to Start of File This option moves the left and right selection cursors to the beginning of the audio data Move Both Cursors to End of File This option moves the lett and right selection cursors to the end of the audio data Insert Silence Sub Menu This option allows inserting a short duration of silence at the location of the left selection cursor Selecting this menu item will open a sub menu shown in Figure 11 18 From this sub menu select the desired amount of silence to insert at the left cursor location Audio data to the right of the lett selection cursor will be shitted to the right to make room for the inserted silence Will TED Ermovative tteetronte veston 0000000 Chapter 11 DRP Editor Move Both Cursors to the End of File ShiFe Ctril End Insert Silence Selected Range Figure 11 18 Insert Silence Sub Menu Selected Range Sub Menu This option provides access to effects that can be applied to a selected region of audio data Clicking on this menu item displays the sub menu shown in Figure 11 19 Insert Silence Selected Range HA Fade Out a Yolurnie Up Ctrlt Up sie Volume Down Ctrl Down Clear Del Figure 11 19 Selected Range Sub Menu Fade In This option will produce a t
137. device then becomes the parent to that new device To add a new device to a group the group must first be highlighted in the tree view using the left mouse button Appicsben Edt Teoh Heg Aree afro Lx 2 feb acs soocru fe acs S10cPU ist Titan RY TROY it Titan Riv TSR E Ttan Pa T9140 E Ttan MOU Tabat Be ACS S1OCPY Lielire it Titan Zone Object Processor TH LEZOP I S40 riben Analyse tot Titans MOU ogomo EA Than NSOU TROGENS scores owingio0 FF Tian Leow Teese y10 2 podetaan FR Teen LOU TRANIO e000 station E Ttan NUR TSO4ONLE Ter Hider E Ttan SOOMTCL TSSEMT Figure 1 13 Add New Menu The figure above Figure 1 13 illustrates a new device being added to the parent device named Training Room Titan ACS It is important to note that when devices are added to specitic types of parents they inherit various properties that associate them with their parent For example a microphone station can be added to a parent announcement controller and it will only be allowed a mic station number that falls within the range assigned to its parent device Edit Selected Selecting this option will open the specitic properties editor tor the selected device Wiw TED Chapter 1 Overview Innovative Electronic Designs Delete Selected Selecting this option will delete the selected object and all child objects associated with this object The system will prompt tor contirmation to
138. dow without opening a take Open File From ACS Ea Language Filename Jo English take9401 dax View D File List Cancel Figure 11 11 Open File trom ACS Click the View DAX File List button to display a window that lists available takes on the ACS Save Select this option to save the changes made to the tile If the file was new a Save as dialog window will prompt tor a tile name Files are saved as either DAX or WAV formats The advantage of saving a file in the DAX format is that it can be easily downloaded to the ACS via IED tile transter sottware However DAX tiles cannot be opened by other audio editing applications Saving as WAV allows the tile to be readily opened and edited using other audio editing applications but cannot be directly transterred to an ACS iin JED uoargeWveunieetiamieimentgeg 00H TDR Ector Files that have been changed but not saved are marked by a red X to the lett of the tilename on the tile tab Saved tiles are marked by a black X to the lett of the filename on the file tab Figure 11 12 shows the tile tab with three unsaved and one saved file J I a tial I pa E untitledi 5 untitled2 x C bemp S401 way CHltempl 9402 wav Ti eee eee eee Figure 11 12 File Tabs Save As This option is used to save a file to a local drive Unlike the Save option clicking on Save As will always bring up a standard Windows Save as dialog where the user is prompted to ente
139. dule 540G configuration and calibration areas of Offline Edit enera Enterprise for systems utilizing the Online Edit legacy 540M hardware Ron Calibration Grants access to a wide variety of ACSDLL system setup and operation features for the announcement controllers in a ACSMonitor Grants access to configure the ACS Genta Monitor tunction 209 Will TED Chapter 13 Password Management Innovative Electronic Designs Application Area Description Permissions Administrator Grants access to the IED Application AppBar GeneralUser Toolbar Grants access to application areas CCGUI specific to the Convention Center GUI application suite Grants access to the DRP Editor DRP Editor application functions as well as restricts the ability to save takes certain ranges Save Take User Range Grants access to manage the Fault Delete Fault Records Fault Logger o l 3 i Logger application Edit Configuration Grants access to configure the LVIODII 9032LVIO hardware to operate with the system Grants access to the configuration and WindowsServiceContiguration audiocontrol roomcontrol All Areas Save All Take Range Contigure operation of the Monitor Test sub MonitorTestDLL system on systems utilizing the legacy Contigure 596M hardware with Gateway computer AdHocAnnc AnncLogView AnncSchedule Contiguration EditSchedule EmergencyAnnouncement Grants access to specitic applications PAConsole t
140. dvanced users should access this area Figure 16 2 shows a typical Contiguration window L Configuration x Figure 16 2 Configuration Window The Contiguration window is divided into three subsections Note Unless there are serious network latency issues the Polling and Registration settings should not be altered trom the defaults e The Polling section controls the rate at which devices are polled Polling Timer Interval which is the overall clock tor the background process the maximum time to wait for a response Response Time out and the number of times to poll an unresponsive device before it is declared as a fault Poll Retries e The Registration section allows setting the interval at which all IED Devices are registered tor faults IED Devices typically report faults to those clients that have registered for fault notitication A device that is registered will report its faults immediately to the System Supervision Service rather than wait for the next poll 265 Will TED Chapter 1G System Supervision Innovative Electronic Designs e The SNMP section allows one to set up destinations to where the System Supervision Service is to report SNMP Traps for each tault clear condition that it encounters These receiving systems would be servers with third party sottware such as a MIB Browser or SNMP Console Setting up and contiguring these systems is beyond the scope of this document 266 Wia JED Inno
141. e Click the Insert Take button to place the highlighted take trom the Takes List to the lett of the current selection in the Assembled Message window Append Take Click the Append Take button to place the highlighted take from the Takes List at the end of the message in the Assembled Message window Replace Take Click the Replace Take button to replace the take that is selected in the Assembled Message window with the take highlighted in the Takes List Delete Selected Click the Delete Selected button to delete the selected take in the Assembled Message window trom the message Filter By Click the Filter By and highlight the Take Types text to open the filter list Selecting any of the available types will limit the display in the Takes List to only takes of that type The filter selection in use is indicated by a check next to the type Figure 9 18 the list of available filter criteria min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Search Assemble Takes _ Insert Take 2 Append Take J Replace Take Filter By Take Number United Airlines _ 1002 American Airlines _ 1003 Delta Air Lines _ 1004 U S Airways _ 1005 British Airways _ 1006 Canadian Airlines _ 1007 Lufthansa _ 1008 KLM Royal Dutch Airlines _ 1009 TWA _ 1010 Continental Airlines 1011 Northwest Airlines Southwest Airlines Department of National Defense Assembled Message Chapter 9 PDRP Messages FAS Variables Show
142. e Change Sequence Flight Delayed Flight Cancelled Flight Gate Change Flight Messages Local Gate Areas General Messages Security Breach Mute System UnMute System Log Out All Terminals H Scroll Boxes Select Flight Message Select Message Select Delay Message Select Cancel Message Security Breach Messages Terminals Figure 6 11 528 Interface Designer Toolbar The function of each button on the toolbar is described below 95 Will TED Chapter 6 528 InterfaceDesigner TT _tanvtive tectonic pests New Template Click this button to create a new blank template Open Template Click this button to open the Open Template dialog box as shown in Figure 6 4 Save Template Click this button to save the current template to the database Delete Template Click this button to delete the current template from the database The application will prompt to contirm the delete action as shown in Figure 6 5 Send to Mics Click this button to open the transter window and send the template to a mic station See Transter Templates on page 104 for details on transferring templates Show Preview Window Click this button to open the preview window for the mic station as shown in Figure 6 12 This displays a simulation of how the buttons will appear on the interface once transferred to a mic station There is a list box at the top of the screen titled User name to view the preview for This list box contains the entire list of mic
143. e Chrl E Save Template Chrl 5 3 Delete Template Ctrl D Exit Figure 6 6 Export Template Menu 3 This will open a standard Windows Save As dialog window as shown in Figure 6 7 x gt 7 DY 7 K searc A Organize 23 Views v New Folder Favorite Links Name v Date modified T Size Ti ECP_528_templ xml 5 12 2010 6 XML Document 4KB ME Desktop jm Computer E Documents E Pictures R Music 4 Recently Changed B Searches J Public Folders A gt File name Exported528MicTemplate xml 7 Save as type Aulki a Geran Figure 6 7 Template Save As Dialog 4 Type in a new name tor the tile in the Filename box The xml tile extension is not required It will be added to the filename automatically it omitted 5 Select xml tiles xml as selected in the Save as type droplist box 6 Select the appropriate tile location using the tile system navigation tools located at the top of the window 7 Click the Save button to save the file Click the Cancel button at any time to close the window without saving the file and return to the editor window Import a Template 1 Click on the File menu and select Import Template From File as shown in Figure 6 8 93 Will TED Chapter 6 528 InterfaceDesigner TT _tanvive tectonic pastas 528 576 Interface Designer File Edit Actions Help Logout Fz New Template Ctrl h Open Template Chri o0 Import Template
144. e Current Permissions window thus granting the user s access to that function Multiple permissions may be selected by holding the CTRL or SHIFT keys while selecting items in the list using the lett mouse button iil JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 13 Password Management gt gt This button is used to add all items in the Available Permissions window to the Current Permissions window This is a quick way to grant a user s access to all permissions associated with the selected application area This button is used to remove the highlighted permission in the Current Permissions window to the Available Permissions window thus removing the user s access to that function Multiple permissions may be selected by holding the CTRL or SHIFT keys while selecting items in the list using the lett mouse button lt lt This button is used to remove all items in the Current Permissions window to the Available Permissions window This is a quick way to remove a user s access to all permissions associated with the selected application area Application Areas Table 13 1 lists the available application areas and their associated permissions for the Password Manager application Table 13 1 Application Areas and Permissions Application Area Description Permissions Gronts permissions forthe 826 528 Control Designer we aes or j Interface Designer application Grants access to the Ambient Analysis Edit Sche
145. e Editor General Zone Type Specific Additional Properties P Guck 66M on Connect Output To Device 570 ACS S1OCPLI mfi O als External zone Number i A Use Alternate Zone Mumber Min Transmitter Ghannel 1 Max Transmitter Ghannel OK Cancel Figure 8 10 Zone Editor Zone Type Specific Tab 127 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 8 Zone Setup Duck BGM on Connect This setting is only available on analog 500D type zones When checked background music is ducked during a mute action that does not have any audio Output To Device This is the device that is associated with the selected zone For example 500D card zones are associated with a 510CPU and digital zones are associated with a T9160 frame The names of the devices available are based on the device names in the treeview External Zone Number This is a number that is passed to another device associated with the zone when the box is checked It is often used for Sign Zone types to indicate the display number that is different from the actual zone number When not checked the zone number passed to the device is the same as the zone number Min Max Transmitter Channel edit boxes This is used for all digital audio connections e g T9160 multi ACS T9032DSP etc This defines the minimum and maximum number of network audio channels the will be used to pass audio between ACS devices Additional Properties Ta
146. e The lett text section displays information on background processes which prevent editing such as make permanent e The right text section displays the currently logged in user or the words Not Logged In if no user is logged in e The lett most graphic section indicates whether or not the Auto Test Configuration window is correctly communicating with the database A green light indicates good communications and red indicates a problem with database communications e The center graphic section indicates whether or not the Auto Test Contiguration window is communicating with the amplifier frame A green light indicates good communications and red indicates that the window is not communicating with the frame 249 Will TED Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto TestConfiguration _inmevative Electronic Designs e The right most graphic section becomes animated whenever the software is busy with some background processing 250 Wim JED Innovative Electronic veston 00 Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto Test Configuration Edit Test Signals Window The Edit Test Signals window allows tor the moditication creation and deletion of the test signal settings tones available tor testing This window can be accessed trom the menus or toolbar of the Auto Test Contiguration Window Note Changes made on this window are not live edits and do not take effect until the changes are saved via the OK button Edit Test Signals B
147. e Time Talker application About ED Time Talker Version 2 0 1 0 9 18 2006 y IED Time Talker Confi Copyright e 1999 2006 Innovate Electonics Design Ine Innovative Electronec Designs linc 9701 Taylowsvile Road Louisville Ky 40299 Phone 502 267 7436 Fax 502 267 3070 http Ayana iedaudio com Figure 12 8 Help Menu and About Box 188 min JED tamovacive etectromte estes 00 Chapter 12 Time Talker Time Talker Setup Since Time Talker is a separate application and does not utilize the same database as Enterprise it must be configured properly before it will function The three configuration windows are described in detail below Frame Options Announcement controllers that can play back time messages are defined in Time Talker as Frames Frames are contigured trom the Frame Options dialog that is opened trom the Edit menu A toolbar at the top of the window provides two buttons The button on the lett is used to Add a new frame to the system using the data in the Name and IP Address Primary fields The button on the right will Delete the frame currently highlighted in the list Note Frames cannot be edited once created To make changes to a frame add a new frame with the correct information and delete the old one Y IED Time Talker Frame Options IP Primary IP Backup Training Room Legacy A 10 2 131 111 10 2 131 112 Mame IP Address Primary IP Address Backup Figure 12 9 Fr
148. e a variety of control and audio Digital Signal Processing Each resides on the network and is able to send and receive digital audio over the network Each device must be contigured properly before it will function as a component of the system and communicate with the Enterprise sottware and any announcement controllers The Titan IPAU Contig Tool is the software application used to configure the device and is covered in the following sections IPAU Config Tool Interface 2 22 2 eee e cece cece eee e cece eecceeeeeeeee 48 ICIS pee caesarean ee oe eae a 48 Toolbar Buttons and Controls ocacncncnccoceccemexssveedaeesesseacadd 49 General Tab 2 22 22 eee cece ec eee cece cece Laaa eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5l Network Tab ott dee ters ecard anataaeed ince naiona iau eosarontinten haute 5d Zone Attn amp Backup Tab occ naccsetcnegeesaceccescdessasausend nobedieeceemnas 59 Mute amp Bypass TAD ssesrssri pedekna a re E E NA 57 BOM Tab Geer ee eee ees 59 The Titan IPAU Config Tool provides low level setup of an individual component of a system This utility provides direct access to many parameters of the IPAU Some of these parameters must be configured from the IPAU Config Tool while others must be modified from Enterprise to ensure proper system operation Several parameters in this section are tagged with one of the three icons below to identify their place in the setup process GALED Parameters with this tag must be configured from the I
149. e facilities with many mic stations When programmed properly entry 1 will always page the local zone Entry 2 will page the local zone plus the adjacent zone This provides a user friendly system by allowing the same buttons to make announcements to the same physical space relative to the mic station instead of requiring the user to remember the individual zone number for each area Figure 4 9 illustrates the relationship of the different combined zone group buttons 69 Will TED Chapter 4 Microphone Station Setup ta nvatve Electronic vests 70 GATE A2 GATE A1 GATE A3 ZONE 102 ZONE 101 ZONE 103 CONCOURSE A ZONE 100 Figure 4 9 Combined Zone Groups Figure 4 10 shows the assignment of a zone group entry code to a combined zone group number Click in the Combined Zone Group column of the table to open a droplist box with the available zone group codes Select the appropriate zone group to correspond with the selected key This Key number corresponds to the number entered on the mic station Combined Zone Groups Gombined Zone Group Entry Gode 11000 1 Entry 1 902 Emg Zone 2 902 911 911 X Button Assignment PDRP Zonemap Override Jj 1 0 None 0 None Bb 2 0 None 0 None J 3 0 None 0 None J 4 0 None 0 None Figure 4 10 Combined Zone Group Droplist Box Mic Switch Code This assigns the zone group or combined zone group entry code to the push to talk PTT switch on the mic station or the 0
150. e monitor speaker to be similar as one switches between points for monitoring The Device Code list box should generally be set to Miscellaneous for points external to the frame The remaining choices only apply to points internal to the frame Collector Unit The Collector Unit group box provides edits that specity where the test point is connected to the system The 124 Handle droplist box lists the available point collector units tor this frame The collector unit to which the point is physically wired should be selected in this droplist box iin JED Knnovative Electronic veston 00 Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto Test Configuration Units which have names enclosed in angle brackets lt gt are cards internal to the frame and should not be selected for most purposes Other external collector units tor example a T9032MT must be added to IED Enterprise betore appearing in this droplist box The Input Number spin edit specities the exact input of the above collector to which the point is physically connected For example on a T9032MT this number corresponds to the physical input number of the T9032MT Reset Points OK and Cancel Buttons The Reset Points button resets all default test points back to default values and restores any detault points which were deleted Points which have been added with the Add Point button are not attected The OK button saves any changes which have been made and then closes the window The Cancel
151. e remaining columns show a more complex organization where several columns share titles in the tirst and second rows The meanings of each column title and their organizational meaning are provided in the following list zone The Zone column lists the page zone it any assigned to each of the channels by which the Points are grouped The data cells in this column span several rows indicating that all of those rows belong to the zone s assigned channel In the case where the same zone is assigned to multiple channels the rows are grouped by channel not zone and theretore the zone will be displayed more than once As stated above the alternating blue and white backgrounds designate channel groupings and theretore each Zone cell completely spans each row of blue or white background Points The Points column lists each of the points available tor testing in the amplitier trame The points are organized by channel so that all of the points on any given channel appear together This grouping is displayed by one Zone cell soanning several Points cells as well as by the alternating blue and white background lt Test Name gt top row of columns three and greater Each detined test has its own column header which spans one or more Frequency columns By Default there are two tests defined the System Test and the Periodic Test each of which by default spans one Frequency column For example in Figure 15 9 the System Test column head
152. e yellow colored horizontal R amp P Level 4 30 A dE reference line The default value is 4 90dB Changing this value will move the reference line Additionally the reference line value can be changed by holding down the SHIFT key and left clicking on the Detail View graph 183 DRP Editor This page has been intentionally left blank 184 Time Talker Time Talker is a sottware application that provides an automated service to play audio cues of the current time at programmed intervals This application is capable of sending time command cues to any combination of zone groups across multiple announcement controllers The following sections describe the contiguration of Time Talker Launching Time Talker fics ete ead elt ae eee ec ura eee 186 Time Talker Configuration Window ec20 causdeteacatnatectenet eeeseees nee 187 FSS ta tee eS Se len A E 187 POI ei Ras scent nes We tN eee oh geh sa Sete oe toes See E pe eos 188 PIA A 32a Sao cae cain tetas Latta aides his lis eee eel Miata esas 188 AR Tagte il Kell lt olgesi 0 0 eee a Meee ONT s a UREN COT a OE Pee E 189 PCIE MONS re ra eae eet a Ne Ml nce SAN St 189 Zoe Mab Selous a eena e a ge N a S 190 USCC OH ONS soris sedenten tet ele a rata 19 MME Evene ise Mie Aa eet aaa hie oe obec ete Gu aa teh ats 193 Define Events niniwid bh outo eel ddd cededhive dt oaaao aaao aonana 193 185 Will TED Chapter 12 Time Talker Innovative Electronic Designs Launching Time Talk
153. e zone group trom the droplist box to play take when the Play button is pressed e Play Press this button to play the Take to the selected zone group Record Take Audio e Use Mic Station Select the mic station that will be used to record the take e Mic Station Status This window displays the mic station status ready active offline or no audio detected e Edit Take Click this button to open the DRP Editor to edit the audio of the take e Show Text Click this button to display a window containing the take text e Record Click this button to activate the selected mic station and record the take The mic station will beep to indicate it is ready Press and hold the mic switch or the Annc O button for gooseneck microphone stations to record the message Release the switch button when finished iil JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 10 Takes Text To Speech This option is only available it the Text To Speech TTS engine and appropriate language options were purchased and installed on the system e Create TTS Click this button to create the take using the TTS engine instead of recording the take trom a mic station The take will be generated and transterred to the announcement controller in the appropriate tile format Note Text must be entered in the Take Text field for this feature to work Distribute DAX File e Send When a take is recorded or edited it is saved only to the announcement controller
154. eatures needed in an airport facility The 528 Interface Designer allows this default configuration to be altered to meet the needs of the installation This opens the use of the 528 series microphone stations in other types of facilities The following sections describe the usage of the 528 Intertace Designer Launching the 528 Interface Designer _ 2 ee eee e eee c ec ecececeeeees 90 MMIC S coe shen deena etaeseeeaacdce ta ceeesedeaedeece eared essere sees 9 Opening Adding Renaming and Deleting 9 Importing and Exporting Templates 0 2 2 02 202e eee eee ee 92 Editing Penile 242 5 45 c2 uete soe sb sadn A Erea 95 Toolbar 2 5525 5ccteusete as ecesecueaecseeenensseeeneeaceee awes se 95 BROWNS iat oles see ok ets a ee ee oe een see ees 98 The Button Bar _ cee cece cece cece cece cee cceececceccecceeceeees 98 Buton Properes a20566222cees seen eesiek nese coke eoeeeeesee tones 29 Scroll Boxes coe se srnecna erst aarestend dividentuc bone deeratiean AE saan 10 Scroll BOX Properties 2cc cecccscuccaceceescndsecdsecsduesacceeases 10 Transfer Templates 2 2 2 2 cece eee c cece cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 104 Bulk Updating of Mic Stations 2 2 cece cece e eee eee eeerereee 105 Announcement Controller Template Storage 2e2e 106 Default Text Table Data 2 2 2 2 cece cece ccc e cece ccc cccccccccceccecs 107 Note This section applies to version 1 0
155. eckbox used to mute the input 23 Will TED Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Innovative Electronic Designs EQ 24 Each channel has a nine band parametric EQ available to adjust the signal as necessary to meet the needs of the loudspeakers and allow the system to be adjusted to maximize intelligibility in the acoustic space Channel Settings Training Room IPAU 10 2 131 125 20096 mfe x File Edit Monitor Help EQ Options Amplifier Channel Parametric Equalizer Amp Status E Card 1 OK 14 9 Gate C4 2 70 KHz Y Model 6472 0 Gate c lt q gt E Channel 1B OK A 2 2 3 3 4 4 34 17 Concourse B S 11 Ticketing Area 12 180 6 Channel Out 135 44 Atten Level a ja 0 oO 12 Baggage Claim A r 9 13 Baggage Claim B 6 14 Upper Curbside 3 15 Lower Curbside 0 3 6 9 oO r na 16 Concourse 4 oO 18 Concourse C 64 19 Security Checkpoint Queing 17 180 36 i j 15 225 F 6B 20 Security Checkpoint 20 31 5 63 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 8K 12 5K 20K 42 7A 21 Food Court 48 a 7B 22 Rental Car Area I Bypass EQ selected Band 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8Je 54 BA 23 Parking Garage Type Center Freg Hz Gain dB Bandwidth Oct E 60 Eg OB 24 Test Zone Peaking 2 70 K 1 50 A 0 332 gt Set Flat 25 0 dB 112 c Logged In hmartin G A lo Figure 2 10 EQ Settings Window Bands are selected by clickin
156. ecord Zoom In This option causes the horizontal axis of the Detail View graph to stretch left and right 3 revealing more details of the waveform Zoom Out This displays a broader view of the waveform in the Detail View a Zoom Into Selected Range This option expands the selected range in the Details View s Zoom Out Fully This option removes all zoom effects from the Detail View Cs Cut This option removes a selected region and places it on the clipboard a Copy This option stores a copy of the selected region on the clipboard Ti Paste This option inserts at the region from the clipboard into the take at the left selection i cursor location Trim This option removes the audio data to the left and right of the selected region he Move Left Cursor to Start of File This option moves the lett selection cursor to the start of the audio data a Move Right Cursor to End of File This option moves the right selection cursor to the end of the audio data b Fade In This option will produce a tade in that begins at the lett selection cursor and ends at the right selection cursor The selection will linearly increase in volume trom silence to the full level It is recommended that a short tace in be placed at the beginning ot all recorded takes to prevent any unwanted pops 182 min JED uowraeiveenieetiamieimentgeg 0 TP T TEDRP Ector Fade Out This option will fade the audio out beginning at the left selection cursor and endin
157. ed in this edit box in order to communicate with it again 49 50 Ml TED Chapter 3 Titan IPAU Contig Tool Innovative Electronic Designs Reload Data after Set Reset When checked the tab shown will be reloaded trom the trame atter a change has been made and data is sent When not checked data will be sent to the frame without validation It is recommended that this option remain checked to provide veritication that the changes were sent and accepted by the trame It will result in slightly longer communication times ltl TED Chapter 3 Titan PAU Contig Tool Innovative Electronic Designs General Tab Zj Titan IPAU Config Tool Oj xj Application Actions Help EI amp ww IP Address M 20 10 11 Set Date M Perm Reset Fit Sft Reset Fetry Dflt JF Reload Data after Set Reset O General Network Zone Atten amp Backup Mute amp Bypass BGM IPAU Name T9160 Titan Integrated Power Amplifier Unit Get Data IPAU Location Seminar System 4 Keep Current Device Handle Bundle Numbers Use 32 Group 16 Frame Handles Dev Handle 19968 Transmitters Receivers Group 15 1 1 15901 1 1 15981 lez a Frame 1 1 2 15902 1 3 0 1 4 0 Calculate New Device Handle Bundle Numbers Dey Handle 19966 Transmitters Receivers Group fis 1 1 fisso1 1 1 41598 Frame J l Minium Test Set Threshold 65 0 A 65 0 PROM version 2 2 3 0 8752 date Aug 20 200
158. ed item trom the list Text This is the text that will display in the scroll box for the selected item Action Type This setting determines the type of action assigned to the item Currently the only type available is Entry Code Action Data This is the data associated with the item that is used when the item is selected Currently the entry code as defined in Enterprise is the only option available This is the code that will be sent to the announcement controller when this item is selected to initiate an announcement e g PDRP Message Number Zone Group Number etc Permissions Each item in the scroll box is shown or hidden based on permissions assigned to each user or mic station Click the button in this column to bring up the permissions editor tor the item as shown in Figure 6 16 102 iin JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 6 528 Interface Designer Permissions x C Allow All User Permissions Allow Same User Permissions As Jal Terminals Allow Specific User Permissions O All Call O Hawaiian Airlines O Korean Airlines CJ AllCallEmergency J GO C WestJet O American Airlines O FAs O Air Canada CJ Delta Air Lines CJ Island Air O Air Pacific O United Airlines O Continental Airlines O Japan Airlines O US Airways O Alaska Airlines O Air Japan O Delta Connection O Omni Air Intemational O JALways O Southwest Airlines O Northwest Airlines CJ China Air Figure 6 16
159. ed later to change the level of the message it needed 7 Click the Enable Monitoring checkbox if the message needs to be monitored through a designated monitor zone 8 Click the Enable Partial Activation checkbox if the message should play to available zones if some zones are active with another announcement that is the same or higher priority It the message has a higher priority than an active announcement then the message will take over the active zones trom the lower priority announcement 133 Will TED Chapter Q PDRP Messages Innovative Electronic Designs 9 Click the Languages amp User Groups tab and check the user groups that will have permission to access this message and select the language s in which the message should play 10 Click the Play Schedule tab and enter how the message should be played See Play Schedule Tab on page 139 11 Click the Assemble Take tab and load the takes for the message See Assemble Take Tab on page 142 12 Click the Destination tab and select the zones where the message will be played To save time a Zone Group can be loaded for the message by clicking the Load Zonemap button and selecting a zone group trom the drop down list 13 Click the OK button to save the changes and close the window Note The Cancel button can be clicked to discard changes and return to the viewer form Edit Click the Edit button to open the editor form for the PDRP message highlighted in the PDRP Viewe
160. een for 3 0 seconds Set VisDID Immediate to return to the lt hidewhendone gt background once message playback is true will not remain visible false will remain visible complete Indicate whether or not VisDID Immediate true mouse cursor will be hidden lt hidemouse gt should hide the mouse cursor while lavi false mouse cursor will be visible playing a message val Blue Green Red Hexadecimal representation of the color to use for the background of VisDID Immediate Messages e g FFOOOO represents the color Blue blue 255 green O red 0 Default time to hold a block of text on lt color gt lt cellholdtime gt screen if no other timing information is provided Provided in 60ths of a second Number of lines to fit on the screen for lt linesperpage gt immediate messages Text is scaled appropriately Blue Green Red Hexadecimal color lt backcolor gt representation for the background color Narre offort fait we val Blue Green Red Hexadecimal color lt color gt l representation for the font color Container node for Prizm Content lt directories gt l Delivery settings The default directory where images will be lt image gt stored locally The detault directory where Prizm Content lt file gt Manager will be stored locally Container node for colors list mapping of lt colors gt simple color numbers like 1 2 3 to RGB values 28 ce
161. emetes ter eeie ae ae RUT mae ean ToD OP O 4 WAC IIIB OG teier eet ps eer Ret that ited Site a ee eg ete Se oe Se tes 6 Application Menu 220 uo set tae eek dulen as caetdemtuneeneeeeeeta 6 Ede coe cca rete ree tees eee neta ee egies 6 oO r aeaa et Sate ence at eee eee a ee ee 8 Poe E se a Seed ets E EAE S A AA EE 10 NSS MSN a useaa a a a ate ase fatten ee 1 a S A et mvs UD a e EIN ACCT eI oR e En APRS Pt Oem RCPS ee 12 tasks ond Deals seaaanenidr ierokas aae 13 DA ee ot tah ete E ae ene EE A E EE EEEE 15 Will TED Chapter l Overview Innovative Electronic Designs Launching Enterprise The icon used for launching Enterprise is located in the Application Toolbar The Application Toolbar is a background application that is used to provide quick access to IED applications running on the system The Application Manager is another background application that manages the IED applications that need to be running to allow the system to operate properly The Application Manager is running when the icon located in the Windows system tray appears green as shown in This icon will be red when the Application Manager is not running Application Manager Icon O ae A Ym ton4an Figure 1 1 Application Manager System Tray Icon The Application Toolbar is located at the top lett of the desktop Figure 1 2 The toolbar may be hidden and only appear as a small thin horizontal tab at the top left of the screen It can be made visible by moving the mou
162. emles wit 215k tal a et ho hike Ge 99 Scroll Boxes sirna aAa od 101 Scroll Box Properties sc aoc ue acadeacesecea oles 10 Transfer Templates 2 2 22 104 Bulk Updating of Mic Stations 105 Announcement Controller Template Storage 106 Default Text Table Data 2 2 107 Zone Group Setup 109 TONG COU DS ooieoe 5 ee hay ates aie 110 Zone Groups Viewer 111 Zone Group Editor iccueeuiveeseviveseesdvevovs 116 Genera derrito denni tl Gur uceta dane eas 116 Destination Tab 2 scdten Medek Soo cwedho sc awaioe 117 Zone Setup 119 TOMES 222i ce eet BS el a aada 120 Zones Viewer 205252202 he Feito od Se 12 ZONE EGUOl hitid tascdsielGineeihl i dacdacee ges 126 General Ta Dosinda abdeseccd takes ats 126 Zone Type Specific Tab 54a fale teeter laa te Aah a 127 Additional Properties Tab 128 PDRP Messages 129 PDRP Messages 22 22 0e eee 130 PDRP Messages Viewer 132 Table of Contents PIR PEGHOR koiraa Re bared A 136 General TaD 2x2 inact see nee es Sates 137 Language User Groups Tab 138 Play Sched UIE TED a4 teraction tammmedcetauesa ated 139 SCMECUICS xe E cere 140 Assemble lake lO wes eee een 2G aka cence 142 Assemble Takes Editor e 143 WESHMONOM NGOs 26 ise Ot SIA eo Lee ts bee 146 Takes 149 Ie AAEE etek yay ieee sense ye bee eee 150 VIEWER etn
163. enerally only the Primary Audio Network Port is used tor both audio and control i Titan IPAU Config Tool 0 x Application Actions Help EI amp Ww IP Address 10 20 10 11 Set Date M Perm Reset Flt Sft Reset Fetry Dflt 7 Reload Data after Set Reset O General Network Zone Atten amp Backup Mute amp Bypass BGM Single Ethernet Firmware Reload All Control Network Port IP Address 10 2 150 172 Net Mask 255 z0 0 0 Default Router O 0 0 0 M Primary Audio Network Port IP Address 10 20 10 1i et Net Mask 255 o 0 0 Default Router 0 0 0 0 M Secondary Audio Network Port IP Address 10 2 150 174 Net Mask 255 cO aO Default Router O 0 0 a0 Figure 3 4 Network Tab The controls on this tab are as follows GAID ingle Ethernet Firmware checkbox This box should remain uncheck for all Titan T9160 and T9032DSP frames CGIE Reload All Click this button to load the data from the frame necessary to update the fields on this tab CL Control Network Port When used this port only provides control data to and from the frame All audio is transmitted and received over the Primary and or Secondary network ports e P Address This is the IP address information for the Control Network Port e Net Mask This is the Subnet Mask information for the Control Network Port e Default Router This is the default router infor
164. ens gt List container for all screens up to tour Ce Attribute signid zoneid displayid Together unique identitier for each VisDID screen in the system To get your sign or zone id you need to find the sign zone you are working on in the zone viewer in Enterprise Open the Zone Type Specitic tab make sure the Use Alternate Zone mid E E Number checkbox is checked The value in zoneid the External Zone Number field is the displayid zoneid the DDC should use Sign id is used to differentiate between different physical displays attached to the DDC Display id is used for serial control of the monitor If multiple screens are present on a DDC there will be multiple screen nodes side by side os The y axis value of the top edge of the Integer representing the location in j VisDID display screen pixels The x axis value of the left edge of the VisDID display screen Note When using multiple monitors on jas one DDC the subsequent screens will Integer representing the location in e usually have an offset value in the lt lef gt pixels coordinate For example the lt left gt value for screen 2 will be the lt width gt of screen The size of the VisDID display screen Positive integer representing the lt height gt l across the y axis height as the number of pixels The size of the VisDID display screen Positive integer representing the lt width gt l across the x axis width as
165. ent user To test a username password combination click the Verify button Figure 13 3 and enter the login credentials in the login window It the combination entered is valid a small Verity Successful window will appear as shown in Figure 13 10 It there is an error a small Verity Failed window will appear as shown in Figure 13 11 In either case click the OK button to close the window and continue Very successful Figure 13 10 Verity Successful Werhy Failed Figure 13 11 Verity Failed 202 Wim JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 13 Password Management Change Password To simply change a user s password select the Change Password menu item or click the Chng PW button on the Password Manager utility The Change Password window for the current user will appear as shown in Figure 13 12 Enter the current password in the Old Password tield Enter the new password in the New Password field and then again in the Confirm Password field Click the OK button to change the password Note Placeholder s will appear in place of actual characters when typing in any of these edit boxes ol Change Password E mfx Old Password New Password x Cancel Confirm Password Figure 13 12 Change Password 203 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 13 Password Management Edit Accounts Select this menu item or the Edit Accts button on the Password Manager utility to open the Edi
166. er Time Talker is a separate application from the main Enterprise application Therefore it is not launched from an icon or menu located within the Enterprise Navigator window The icon for launching Time Talker is typically located on the IED Application Bar as shown in Figure 12 3 On some legacy systems it may have been installed at a later time and is available as a shortcut icon on the desktop oO Figure 12 1 Time Talker Icon HOA Molise a Figure 12 3 Application Bar al Figure 12 2 B Double click the Time Talker icon to launch the application The IED Time Talker Configuration window will appear as shown in Figure 12 4 From here current time events can be modified or new events created Y IED Time Talker Configuration ioj x File Edit Help Time Events ACS Name English Euro Dema 15 English Euro Demo 30 English Euro Demo 745 English Euro Demo Debug Service Apply OK Figure 12 4 Time Talker 186 min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 12 Time Talker Time Talker Configuration Window The Time Talker Configuration window displays a list of time events as shown in Figure 12 4 and the edit option buttons Events are added edited or deleted using the buttons located on the toolbar as shown in Figure 12 5 Add Edit Delete Figure 12 5 Toolbar Buttons Add Click this button to add a new event to the schedule Edit Click this button to edit the highlighted
167. er spans two Frequency columns 400Hz and 1Khz Essentially this means that both 400Hz and 1 kHz tones are used separately during the Periodic Test Test Columns headers have borders which are slightly thicker and darker A clock symbol in this column header indicates that the test is scheduled to run automatically See the Edit Test Schedules window tor more intormation lt Frequency gt second row of columns three and greater Each defined test signal has its own column header labeled with the tone s frequency which spans three Test Results columns Set Test and Dev For each Frequency column header the same three result columns are repeated so that the three values in these columns may be shown for each trequency For example in Figure 15 9 each of the trequency columns 400Hz 1KHz and 20kHz span three columns Set Test and Dev In essence this means that each point may be tested tor each trequency within a given test Set Test and Dev third row of columns three and greater These three column headers each specify the actual result data for the frequency and test under which they are grouped All three columns are shown for each frequency whether or not any points are actually contigured for testing under that trequency test The values 299 Will TED Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto TestConfiguration _nmevative Electronic Designs 240 shown in these columns are measured at the point listed in the
168. erce es cy Sa ms EE een See A yee 150 WICWOER secan nece atest oer ace et eee estos wee ee aaeause AES on Eel AE S i et fen pee Ce en at Scott hee a2 Se eat nt A ete ete eh 156 System wide Take POs 25 S52 a rota coe testes uw pel dda ete sh ae ea 156 Record Play Take Tab 22 2 eee eee eee eee eee cece eeees 158 ALES RII e ae ame AI eae RRC EIT ne AS tne AACE REIS ORE AR 159 149 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 10 Takes Takes Takes are audio segments that are stored as tiles on the system These can be either a whole message or a snippet like a word or short phrase to be assembled into a complete message The current takes in the system are managed trom the Takes Viewer window Takes are added to the system using the Editor window Takes are accessed trom the Takes icon in Enterprise as shown in Figure 10 1 E IED Enterprise Application Edt Tools Help A Logout Ju alxl e Ee jap Training Room ACS Titan System F Training Room Titan ACS Y Mic Stations Ea ACS S10N Card Training oan IPA BEB Training Room 9032NS EER Titan LWIOU T9032 V10 W 590 Server E peep Training Room ACS Legacy System E Gh Training Room Legacy ACS Takes Icon Figure 10 1 Enterprise Navigator Window There are two windows involved for editing takes the Takes Viewer and the Take Editor Each is described in the sections that follow 150 Wia JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter
169. erence that degrades intelligibility Channel Settings Training Room IPAU 10 2 131 125 20096 E of x File Edit Monitor Help Amplifier Channel Delay Amp Status Delay Time E Card 1 OK 14 9 Gate C4 42000 Model 6472 ajm E Channel 1B OK 1800 24 11 Ticketing Area a Channel Out i 4 2B 12 Baggage Claim 4 E E aeza o iaa 3A 13 Baggage Claim B 1400 o 3B 14 Upper Curbside 44200 on 15 Lower Curbside 16 Concourse 4 4 4 Pr 1000 i o 5A 17 Concourse B 800 24 5B 18 Concourse C oi 2 600 30 _j 6A 19 Security Checkpoint Queing 400 36 n 6B 20 Security Checkpoint j 42 7A 21 Food Court iE fe 48 7B 22 Rental Car Area 54 I 84 23 Parking Garage ne u 60 i 8B 24 Test Zone Bypass Delay 25 0 aB 420 Logged In hmartin G A tu Figure 2 20 Delay Setting on a Titan Channel Delay Time Slider Edit Box Precise delay times are set by entering a value in the edit box Valid entries can range trom Oms to 2000ms The delay time can also be adjusted by dragging the slider up and down to the desired value Bypass Delay This button effectively removes any delay applied to the signal by taking the delay object out of the digital signal path The delay time is effectively set to Oms without losing the delay time setting previously entered using the edit bo
170. ers numerically trom lett to right on the Frequency Response Display 26 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Ambient Analysis Titan series amplifier frames are equipped with ambient noise compensation Ambient Analysis capabilities when paired with a noise sensor collector such as a T9032NS Ambient Analysis adjusts the output attenuation of a channel in response to ambient noise level measured in the area served by the channel Anywhere trom one 1 to tour 4 ambient noise sensors can be assigned to each channel Channels can also be slaved to other channels This functionality is configured from the Ambient Analysis view on the Channel Settings window as shown in Figure 2 11 Channel Settings Training Room IPAU 10 2 131 125 20096 i mfe x Fie Edit Monitor Help Amplifier Channel Ambient Analysis Amp Status m Attenuation Mode E Card 1 OK 2 Gate C4 C Fixed futomatid C Slave To one Model 6472 1B 10 Gate cS oO Channel 14 OK 24 11 Ticketing Area Ar _Assign Sensors gt OF A TI n Channel Qut 2B 12 Baggage Claim A 5 r er asy Program Sensors Gain Calc Filter Limit Ambient Out Level 34 13 Baggage Claim B Tr 3B 14 Upper Curbside I o 100 Constant oen j Level Level Threshold Scaling Fast Gain Range Attenuation 44 15 Lower Curbside fe ae ESA T 4B 16 Con
171. es Welcome to Abilene Municipal Airport For the health and comfort of the traveling public all terminals are smoke free Smoking is permitted at designated curbside areas only Thank you To prevent takes trom running together the system also has takes that are nothing but silence These takes are inserted in between individual takes to produce natural pauses in the message In addition to silence the system also contains takes of chimes or alert tones to gain attention to the announcement To produce the tinal Welcome message the following takes will be assembled using the PDRP Editor Take Number Description Text 9991 1 Second of silence Welcome to Abilene Municipal Airport For the health and comfort of the traveling public all 7250 terminals are smoke free Smoking is permitted at designated curbside areas only 1 Second of silence is recommended at the beginning of all PDRP messages Once a PDRP message has been assembled it can be played through a variety of methods Messages can be programmed to play on a schedule so they will play every few minutes to specific areas of the facility Schedules offer flexibility by allowing messages to play only during a certain date range certain times of the day or only on specitic days of the week A good application example for this feature would be a major event occurring in a city over a specific weekend The airport wants to play a special welc
172. escription Calibration In order tor the ambient analysis function to operate properly it must be calibrated A detailed tutorial is provided later in this manual describing the calibration process Calibration Take oss Use Live Announcement Test Figure 2 17 Calibration Calibration Take This is the take message number that will be played to the zone during the calibration process The take number can be manually typed in the box or adjusted using the up down arrow buttons on the right side of the entry box Use Live Announcement Check this box it a live announcement trom a microphone station will be used for calibration instead of a numbered take 32 iin JED Innovative Electremte Destans 000 Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Calibrate Press this button to start the calibration process The Calibration Take will be played to the channel output unless the Use Live Announcement box is checked It the Use Live Announcement is checked the designated microphone station will beep tlash ready to indicate that a live page must be made to proceed with the calibration Calibration Take foss t Use Live Announcement Test Figure 2 18 Stop Calibration While the calibration is in process the Calibrate button will change to a Stop button as shown in Figure 2 18 The calibration process can be interrupted at any time by pressing the Stop button Caution The ambient noise level in the are
173. esigner s main purpose is to provide a simple tool to manipulate these properties Template Name This is the name of the template as stored in the database Enable Keypad When checked the numeric keypad on the 528 mic station will accept numeric entries as defined in IED Enterprise under Entry Code Definitions When unchecked the numeric keypad cannot be used to enter page codes The mic station functionality is restricted to the soft buttons mapped to the display The keypad is still used to enter variable information when prompted by the intertace Toolbar The toolbar is located at the top of the application window as shown in Figure 6 11 Some buttons appear grayed out when that particular tunction is not available Availability is based on the button or scroll box selected in the tree view located along the lett side of the application window 528 528 Interface Designer X E 5 x Fie Edit Actions Help Ea New Open Save Delete Send To Show Preview Add Delete Move Move Add Delete Template Template Template Template Mics Window Button Button ButtonUp Button Down Scroll Box Scroll Box Template Name IMPORTED IED Training Room Enable Keypad T Button Bar Enter Claim Number Enter Gate Number Button Width fii 10 z Next Departure Arival Message Button Default BackgroundColor C w Pause Sequence Repeat Last Departure Button Default Text Color Select Seq Step Add FAS Languag
174. evious b Mext Figure 5 17 Mic Station User Editor OK Cancel Editing an existing user opens a window with two additional buttons Clicking on the Previous and Next buttons allows quick navigation to the previous and next records in the viewer Navigating to a new record via the Next and Previous buttons atter making changes to the data in the editor will result in a contirmation prompt as shown in Figure 5 18 The prompt options are as follows e Yes Save current changes before navigating away e No Do not save changes before navigating away e Yes to All Save current and all subsequent changes while navigating using the Previous and Next buttons without any additional prompts 86 min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 5 Mic Station Security x Data has changed Do you want to save current data before moving to another one ho Yes to all Figure 5 18 Edit Contirmation Dialog Box Edit a Mic Station User The steps necessary to edit an existing Mic Station User are as follows Highlight a user in the Mic Station User viewer window Click the Edit button located on the toolbar Make necessary changes to the data on the form Click on the OK button to save and return to the Mic Station Users viewer oe aS Note The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to discard changes and return to the viewer form Delete This option allows deleting the currently selected
175. eway click on the Gateway Computer icon see Figure 14 1 on the tree view in Enterprise This changes the right panel of Enterprise to the Gateway contiguration options as shown in Figure 14 2 Gateway Gateway Computer ACS Training Room Legacy ALS Configure Test Results Monitor Zone Monitor Mics Help Gateway Monitor Test Monitor Points Configuration Figure 14 2 Gateway Configuration Icons 214 Will TED Innovative Eleetrente Designs 00 Chapter 14 596 Series Test Configuration Configure Monitor Points This section is used to detine the monitor points managed by the Gateway and their automated test properties Clicking this icon displays the monitor point contiguration grid as shown below in Figure 14 3 Each 596 unit used in the system will be shown on a separate tab and is selected by clicking the corresponding tab at the top of the form x ACS Output ACS Output Z3 Baggage Claim Area ACS Output 4 Ticketing Area ACS Output 5 Upper Curbside ACS Output ACS Output Z7 Security Checkpoint ACS Output 8 Concourse A ACS Output 16 Test Zone ACS Output Zone 16 Z1 American Airlines Gate E5 Equalizer Output Slot 14 72 United Airlines Gate E6 Equalizer Output Slot 1B Clear Point Import Cancel Apply Figure 14 3 Contigure Monitor Points Grid Monitor Point Grid The columns in the grid are as follows Input This represents the physical input on the 596 where the monitor point is wired ACS Zone Locat
176. exit the window Cancel Click this button to exit the window and discard any changes that were made General Tab The general tab see Figure 4 5 has the basic information for the mic station and is used to initially detine the mic station Options available on this and other tabs are determined by the type of mic station detined on this tab Mic Station Editor x General Permissions amp User Settings Groups Companies amp Gates Key amp Button Assignements Sidekick L gt Mic Number f A valid Mic Station Numbers 1 56 Location emic Location gt Mic Type 500Fmc mic station M Activate Mic Station E Lock Mic Station EPROM Version 5 1 y Figure 4 5 General Tab The controls on the General Tab are as follows 65 Will TED Chapter 4 Microphone Station Setup ti nvative Electronic Pestans Mic Number This is the microphone station ID number used to associate a mic station in the software with the physical piece of hardware For 528 Series mic stations each must be contigured locally by accessing the setup teatures of the mic station Each station is associated to an announcement controller by a Group number and by the Mic Number Both must be set correctly in order tor a mic station to tunction properly For analog mic stations 500 and 508 Series the mic number is determined by where the station is terminated on the 500C interface card Note This mic station
177. filename will be saved and closed automatically and those that are labelled untitled will be closed atter a tilename is entered using the standard Windows Save as dialog boxes Confirm P untitled has changed Do you want to sawe it i No Cancel Yes to all Figure 11 15 Save Prompt File Properties This option opens an information window as shown in Figure 1 16 Information such as length sample rate bits per sample etc are displayed on this window Currently the DRP 170 Win JED LOAA OCENE SE 00H TT TDP Ector Editor only supports WAV tiles that have a sample rate of 16 kHz 16 bits per sample and 1 channel mono of data WAV tiles of a format other than that specitied cannot be properly converted to DAX tiles that are required tor the ACS WAYE File Properties Es Length 1 74 sec Data Size 55605 bytes Audio Format PCM Samples Per Sec 16000 Hz Average Bytes Per Sec 32000 Number of Channels 1 mana Block Size 2 Bits Per Sample 16 Figure 11 16 File Properties Exit This option closes the application The user is prompted for action regarding any unsaved files Edit Menu The Edit menu contains options to modify the take Edit wiew Tools Help Undo Ctril z eg Cut Etrit L copy Ctrl C I Paste Ctrl y Ek Trim Ctrl T Select All Cerl 4 J Move Left Cursor to Start of File Shift Home E Move Right Cursor to End of File Shift End Move Both Cursors to the Star
178. frame which runs the tests being edited in this window e The frame s description e The frame s IP address e Anumeric identifier for the frame This number is often called the 124 device handle It is unique to the system and is used by some low level tools to identity the frame 251 Will TED Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto TestConfiguration _nmevative Electronic Designs 252 Test Settings list box Add Setting button and Del Setting button The Test Settings list box shows the currently defined signal settings displaying both the Frequency and the Setting Name for each signal setting The details of the selected signal setting are editable in the Test Data group box and if available the Advanced Options group box on the right To change which signal setting is being edited simply select the desired signal setting by clicking on it in this list box Clicking the Add Setting button to adds a new setting with default values and automatically select it so that it is available for immediate editing Clicking the Del Setting button deletes the currently selected signal setting Note Every amplifier frame leaves the factory with two default signal settings These settings are labelled 20KHz 1 Inaudible Settings and 1KHz 2 Audible Settings The 20KHz setting cannot be deleted and is not available for use except with the also factory default Periodic test which is sometimes referred to as the Inaudible test Beca
179. g Amp Frame 10 81 31 11 19072 ey BigRed ACS SLOCPU 4 ee iin Te E ad M i Mic Stations i Channel Test Meter Bridge Aa c1i0N 1 Settings Bigkeg 4mp Frame Cards Channels weet _ONCOUSE Amo Frame i l 13111 Figure 15 1 Accessing the Auto Tests Window The Auto Tests window displays information regarding the currently configured tests along with the most recent results if any for those tests Additionally the Auto Tests window provides the ability to manually initiate tests perform sets play the test tone for a specific point refresh the displayed test results open the Auto Test Configuration window and print test result information via IED Print Manager Note User access to features of the Auto Tests window are controlled by permissions Some features of the Auto Tests window may not be available if the user does not have that level of permission 234 Will TED Innovative Electronic veston 00 Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto Test Configuration Auto Tests BigReg Amp Frame 10 81 31 11 19072 File Edit wiew Het titan zone 9 5 Chan 14 Ambient Out 6 Chan 14 Amp Input Chan 14 Amp Output B Chan 14 Speaker Current 445 titan zone 10 Chan 1B Ambient Out Chan 16 Amp Input Chan 1B Amp Output TIF Chan 16 Speaker Current uun titan zone 11 Chan 24 Ambient Out Chan 24 Amp Input Chan 24 Amp Output T77 Chan 24 Speaker Current utm titan zone 12 Chan 26 Am
180. g at the right selection cursor The selection will linearly decrease in volume trom the full level to silence It is recommended a short tade out be placed at the end of all recorded takes to prevent any unwanted pops Insert Silence This option allows inserting short durations of silence at the location of the left selection cursor Clicking on this option produces the sub menu shown in Figure 11 18 Select From To o The values in the textboxes control the positions of Select From 3494 zi To far zd the left and right selection cursors The spin edit labeled Select From controls the position of the left selection cursor The spin edit labeled To controls the position of the right selection cursor Changing the values in the spin edit boxes moves the left and right cursor positions on the display Alternatively clicking on different regions on the graph updates the values in the textboxes Volume t of NP gi The value in the Volume determines the percentage of volume lume J o Ne s to increase or decrease when the Volume Up and Volume Down buttons or menu items are selected Toggle Reference Line This button toggles the yellow colored horizontal line on and off The line acts as a reference for the audio level that all takes should be contained within so that the volume of a recorded take is consistent with the volume of other pre loaded takes Reference Line Level This textbox displays the dB value of th
181. g on one of the nine buttons immediately below the trequency response curve graph Aspecitic band can be selected and then adjusted using the edit boxes below the buttons It is also possible to select a filter and edit its frequency gain and bandwidth directly in the Frequency Response display window Select a filter by clicking one of the nine filter buttons in the Selected Bands section Adjacent bands can be selected by using the ALT RIGHT ARROW and ALT LEFT ARROW key combinations A band can also be selected by clicking on one of the red dots in the frequency response graph The dot representing the selected band will turn green and from one to three triangles will appear at the top of the display with the center triangle containing the filter number The special key combinations for changing bands and controlling parameters are listed in the table below Hi Pass or Lo Pass Filter Types iil JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Type Droplist box Select a filter type in the Type droplist box The available options are e Peaking bandpass type filter e Notch Sharp bandpass cut type filter e Hi Pass Filter tor rolling off frequencies lower than the cutoff frequency e Lo Pass Filter for rolling off frequencies higher than the cutoff frequency e Disabled Turn this filter off Note The options for the filter parameters will change slightly depending on the filter type se
182. gnments Button Assignment PDRP Zonemap Override 1 502 Gate E2 0 None LjJ2 1708 Curbside 10 All Call 3 4 Entry 4 502 Gate E2 5 Entry 5 0 None Figure 4 11 Mic Button Assignments Tab Combine 520 series mic stations only The 520 series mic stations have eight 8 assignable buttons in addition to the mic switch and have added functionality that allows buttons to be combined Figure 4 12 shows the button assignments for a 520 mic station In this example buttons 1 5 are designated as Combined Those buttons now function differently and will not initiate an announcement when pressed Instead the station will wait until the mic switch or announce button is pressed and a page will be made to a combination of all zones in the zone groups selected When buttons are configured in this mode they will toggle when pressed In the example if button 1 was pressed and then button 2 was pressed both would be selected as indicated by a green LED indicator When the mic switch or announce button is pressed the announcement will be made to all zones in both zone groups 101 and 102 Will TED Chapter 4 Microphone Station Setup Innovative Electronic Designs Combined fone Groups R Combined Zone Group 1 0 None Z 0 None 3 O None 5 0 Mone Mic Switch Code Combined Zone Group Entry Code la Mone 11000 Mic Button Assignments Button Assignment PERF Zonemap Override Combined ji 101
183. gout Opens the login window or causes the currently logged in user to be logged out This functionality is also available by pressing F2 Print Opens IED Print Manager See the section of this document on Enterprise Printing tor information on IED Print Manager This functionality is also available by holding down lt Ctrl gt and pressing P Close Closes the Auto Test Configuration window This functionality is also available by pressing F10 If any changes have been made choosing this option will cause Changes Not Saved dialog box to appear SS xi Changes have not been sawed e Click Yes to save changes Mo to discard changes or Cancel to go back Figure 15 6 The Changes Not Saved dialog box In the Changes Not Saved dialog box the Yes button saves changes and closes the Auto Test Contiguration window the No button closes the Auto Test Contiguration window without saving and the Cancel button returns to the Auto Test Contiguration window without saving 245 Will TED Capp Tig ee si es om EEEE EEE Edit Edit Signal Settings Opens the Edit Test Signals window Edit Test Schedules Opens the Edit Test Schedules window Edit Points Definitions Opens the Edit Test Points window This option requires the current user to have the Contigure Adv Test Params permission under Titan DLL in IED s Password Manger Help About Displays the About window Point Selection Grid The Point Selection Grid see Fig
184. gree ot flexibility tor user access Control is accomplished by the use of passwords and permissions assigned to each user in the system The system utilizes a centralized security server that runs in the background to manage user access to various functions on all server and client computers in the system The tollowing sections explain the contiguration of users and their permissions Accessing Password Configuration Options e eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 196 Logins Lodo M esnean ek Sawateacaaccaates ded cedhes nen acovdeanseesaueecne 198 Application Management ecads2oderee sti stacdande ewe th cave twee ees 199 CONNGUS SEVEN onions cere AEN ee eso ees 200 Opon Taoa a aaa Rr RCeE MONT PIE Par or eta Per or PEL 200 longudge WN Ob wicca das ercatpon we tustese muses peanee nemesis 201 V a a a a a eA 202 Change PassWord 2222s ntan ees ae EE E E A 203 ECIPACCOUIIS scacsoe ana aee ee a a e r aa a aE 204 KAE E EEEE EEO E tne tee ute me AT EE I OAE 204 Uer ATOU aosa aa aaa a a OaS 205 Application Areas wre te tte sisi a ih se Legere tk 2 BSE tt ee 209 195 Will TED Chapter 13 Password Management Innovative Electronic Designs Accessing Password Configuration Options There are two different methods for accessing the password configuration options Primarily users are contigured trom the IED Application Bar as shown in Figure 13 1 This provides direct access to the tour essential areas needed to manage users passwords and permissions goe
185. gth of the take This option can be used to remove all leading and trailing noise from a take View Menu The options from the View menu are used to modify the way the audio data is displayed in the Detail View This menu Figure 11 21 provides access to commands to zoom in and out of the take to allow better editing It also provides the ability to select between any of the take tiles currently open in the application View Tools Help Foon In SS 200m Que Ce zoom Into Selected Range C zoom Cut Fully untitled untitled2 wo Abemp 9401 way CiibempyS402 maw Figure 11 21 View Menu Zoom In This option causes the horizontal axis of the Detail View to stretch lett and right revealing more details of the waveform Unlike a true zoom in feature the vertical axis representing the amplitude of the audio remains unchanged Figure 1 1 22 illustrates how a zoomed in region appears in the Detail View The Zoom In command can be used multiple times to provide up to ten times magnification of the waveform 174 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter l DRP Editor DRP Editor Iof x File Edit view Tools Help 4 x gt Local n B Record jaa GG js O R 4b EEE Select From 294521 vj To 360241 vj volume f1 vj K ale ses Ref Level 4 90 tjd E untitled1 E untitled2 C temp 9401 way C1 C temp 9402 wav X C WINDOWS Medialtada
186. guage English Mas Connections E Disabled v Figure 13 16 New User Edit User Information To edit information about the selected user click the Edit User Information button or select User Information from the Edit menu to display the Edit User form as in Figure 13 17 Login Information Name myvechsler Password Confirm Password Weer Information First Name Aon Last Hame Wechsler Language English UEN Max Connections ET Disabled fv Figure 13 17 Edit User Name This the unique username that applies to this user and is the name that must be used at the login prompt This name may or may not have any relationship to the user s legal name which can be entered in the First Name and Last Name fields This is the name 206 iin JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 13 Password Management entered trom the New User window and is read only and cannot be changed Password This tield is used to enter the password for the user The password should be some combination of letters and or numerals which can be remembered by the user For good security it should be six or more characters in length Obvious choices such as the user s phone number address or social security number are not recommended When typing in this field the characters are not visible and will be shown as for security purposes Confirm Password This tield is used to re
187. gure 9 19 Assemble Takes Search Result Shown OK Click the OK button to save changes and exit the Assemble Takes Editor Cancel Click the Cancel button to close the Assemble Takes Editor and discard any changes made Destination Tab The Destination tab is used to define the default zones for this message Figure 9 20 shows the Destination Tab and is very similar to the Zone Group Editor window tor Emergency and Terminal zone groups There are sub tabs tor each announcement controller in the system 146 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter Q PDRP Messages PDRP Editor xi Select the zones you would like this PDRP message to play out to Training Room Titan ACS Training Room Legacy ACS Figure 9 20 Destination Tab Announcement Controller Tabs These tabs are for selecting each announcement controller in order to view and select zones that are owned by that device Zone Array On each tab there is an array of zones available on that device Toggle the selection of each zone on or off by clicking on it to determine if it this message will play to that zone Multiple sequential zones may be selected by clicking the first zone holding the SHIFT key then selecting the last zone in the sequence A flyover window will appear that displays the location associated with the zone number 147 Chapter 9 PDRP Messages Load Zonemap PDRP Editor General Languages User Groups Play Schedule Assemble
188. h contains general information pertaining to the whole window e The Points list box the Add Point button and the Del Point button e The Circuit Data group box e The Collector Unit group box e The Reset Points button the OK button and the Cancel button Title Bar In addition to the window name the title bar at the top of the Auto Test Configuration window displays the following information about the amplifier frame which runs the tests being edited in this window e The frame s description e The frame s IP address e Anumeric identifier for the frame This number is often called the 124 device handle It is unique to the system and is used by some low level tools to identity the frame Points list box Add Point button and Del Point button The Points list box lists the currently detined test points with the currently selected point highlighted in blue 259 Will TED Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto TestConfiguration _nnevative Electronic Designs 260 The Add Point button adds a new point with default parameters and automatically selects that point for editing The Del Point button deletes the currently selected point Circuit Data The Circuit Data group box details the parameters of the selected test point many of which are dependent on the circuit to which the point is attached The Point Description edit box allows editing of a human readable description for each point This description is shown in
189. hat are used as a live PA console interface LiveAnnc MacroCreate PDRPAnnc QuickPickCreate TTAnnc PrintManager Grants access to print reports Print G i he Pri Add Devices PRIZMCMS rants See to contigure the Frizm CMS application Delete Devices Grants access to the functions available PRIZMContentManager in the Prizm Content Manager Edit Existing Devices cmEditBilling cmEditChannels cmEditCust cmEditMedia cmEditPlaylists cmEditScreens application cmGenerateReports cmViewBilling cmViewCust 210 iin JED Innovative Electronic Designs Application Area PrizmSmartClient_ Admin PrizmSmartClient_ General PrizmSmartClient_ UserOptions SYSTEM TitanDLL Description Grants access to the administrative functions of the Prizm Smart Client application Grants access to general areas of the Prizm Smart Client application Grants access to various configuration options for the Prizm database Grants access to various system wide parameters Grants access to the features specifically related to the Titan series frames in a system Chapter 13 Password Management Permissions EditableGroupCodes DailyFlightTypes DailyROFields 211 Password Management This page has been intentionally left blank 212 596 Series Test Configuration This section describes the contiguration of the Monitor Test sub system for installations that use the 596 series components for sy
190. he actual level of the signal at this point will vary proportionally with the loudspeaker load since it directly represents the current in the speaker line A higher power amplifier load will result in more current drawn trom the power amplifier thus increasing the level of the converted signal Show Meter When this option is checked the Signal Meter Figure 2 28 will be displayed When enabled the Signal Meter will always be displayed on top of other application windows that are currently open Figure 2 28 Signal Meter Auto Show Meter When this option is checked the Signal Meter will automatically be displayed when a monitor point is selected trom either the menu or by clicking on the monitor point icon in the signal tlow When not checked the Signal Meter must be opened manually by checking the Show Meter menu option Help Menu Currently the only option available under the Help menu is to display the About Box Help j to Figure 2 29 Help Menu About Box This window displays information specific to the T9160 DLL tile This is the application tile that specitically governs communications between the Enterprise Sottware Suite and the Titan Series T9160 or T9116 hardware devices This window provides the tile version date moditied size and location on the host computer 4 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration About T9160 DLL T9160 DLL See Cop
191. ick the Filter button to open a drop down menu of available take types to display This allows the user to only view takes of the type selected in the Filter By menu A check next to the type indicates the current filter setting ee Dii r t s E o oM Erea ED ip T oa Mi ib i E H A Aris Air Arim jermi Leet Erre are ie i 1 FFF TE E AEF HH pidi EFF 3H J i Arie aie PT irrar Glee rire Eris farre ob Hri iiia Piia SE i L JEFTEN amp iia i d i Pree Ee h Tih eet Figure 10 8 Takes Viewer Filter Filter the Takes list 1 Click the Takes icon from the enterprise Navigator window to open the viewer 2 Click the Filter button then move the cursor down to highlight the Set Filters menu item 3 Select the language for the takes to be displayed from the Languages menu Figure 10 8 4 Select the take type to be displayed from the Take Type menu Figure 10 8 Select Show All to show all types in the list Print This button interfaces with the IED Print Manager software to open the print preview window containing the takes data Refer to the IED Print Manager section for more information on this feature OK Click the OK button to close the viewer 155 Will TED Chapter 10 Takes Innovative Electronic Designs Take Editor Adding a new take or editing an existing take will open the Editor
192. ick this button to add a new mic station to the system This will open the Mic Station Editor window to contigure the new mic station Edit Click this button to open the Mic Station Editor tor the highlighted mic station Delete Click this button to delete the selected mic station Multiple mic stations can be selected at the same time using CTRL CLICK and SHIFT CLICK functions Print Click this button to open the print preview window with a list of mic stations and their settings OK Click this button to exit the Viewer window mijn JED Innovative Etectremte Destans Chapter 4 Microphone Station Setup Mic Station Editor Figure 4 5 shows the Mic Station Editor window This window contains multiple tabs visible along the top of the window Each tab contains ditterent setup options as they relate to the description of the tab There are more tabs than can be visible at the same time due to the width limitations of the window The left right arrows located to the far right are used to scroll through all the available tabs When the editor is used to edit an existing mic station Previous and Next buttons will be visible in the lower left corner of the window These are used to go to the previous or next mic station in the list without existing the editor The user will be prompted to save the changes betore moving to the previous next mic station it any changes have been made OK Click this button to save all changes and
193. ick this button to start a mic station set or test The function executed is based on the selection made in the Single Circuit radio button group Close Click this button to close the window 229 Will TED Chapter 14 596 Series Test Configuration tnnvative tleetromte pestare Gateway Configuration Double click the Gateway Configuration icon to open the window shown in Figure 14 9 Configuration He r Number of Zones 24 Mumber of Mics amp IP Addresses in Network dat 405 IP Addresses Figure 14 9 Gateway Contiguration Window The window displays the IP addresses that the gateway uses to communicate with other devices in the system It also shows the total number of zones and mics programmed in the system This is a read only display as these items are contigured elsewhere in Enterprise 226 min JED innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 14 596 Series Test Configuration Monitor Test Double click the Monitor Test icon to open the Monitor Testing window as shown in Figure 14 10 This window has tive tabs and is used to configure various supervision parameters as well as initiate a system wide set or test OK Click this button to save changes and close the window Cancel Click this button to close the window without saving any changes Apply Click this button to save the changes without closing the window General Tab Monitor Testing J X Cerera audible Zones Mic TestZone set Test
194. ies gt lt image gt C IED VIS Images lt image gt lt file gt C IED VIS files lt file gt lt directories gt lt detaults gt lt immediate gt lt screen gt lt screens gt lt colors gt lt colorid 5 val FFFFOO gt lt colors gt lt vis contig gt iin JED Knmovative electronic Destans O Chapter 17 VisDID Setup Tag List The following is a list of all tags present in the VisDID xml tile with explanations and possible values for all elements and attributes The outline tree structure will mirror the tree structure of the file Alltags lt gt need to have a matching closing tag lt gt or be closed themselves lt gt in a rigid tree structure i e lt x gt lt y gt some value lt y gt lt z gt some value lt z gt lt x gt Tag Definition Value Root level node forthe entire document Integer representing the number of Amount of time that the applications are to 9 P 9 lt htmltimeout_msec gt milliseconds 1000milliseconds wait before abandoning an HTML request 1 second Amount of time with continuous errors the Integer representing the number of lt blackouttime_msec gt screen will wait betore showing a black milliseconds 1 000milliseconds page 1 second Integer representing the number of Amount of time with continuous errors the ae ae lt maxdhtmlwait_msec gt milliseconds 1 000milliseconds screen will wait before refreshing itself d secon lt scre
195. ifferent zone group types in a system Local Terminal and Emergency Local zone groups are contined to zones within a single announcement controller while terminal and emergency zone groups are global to all announcement controllers in the system These types are user detined to each behave a certain way Announcement properties such as priority and if an announcement is live or recorded are determined by the zone group type For example emergency zone groups are programmed to have a higher priority than the other types When an emergency announcement is made it will override any other announcements that are active in any of the same zones 110 Ae Ju aixle E IED Enterprise E Application Edit Tools Help l Logout ACS Specific Tasks Mics Zones System wide Tasks amp a s Languages Takes FAS Variables iieietiitie ntry Code Definiti AN ei aad 2 psy Mic Station Send Data Priorities Announcem User Groups FAS Templates Companies Users Definitions General I Figure 7 1 Enterprise Navigator Window Wim JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter Zone Group Setup Zone Groups Viewer Double click the Zone Groups icon as shown in Enterprise Navigator Window on page 110 to open the Zone Groups Viewer See h1 SectionTitle on page 111 This window provides a list of all zone groups currently programmed in the selected announcement controller This window provides access to edit or delete existi
196. igReg Amp Frame 10 81 31 11 19072 z IEE Test Settings Test Data Setting Name Setting Name 5 External Signal Source Frequency 400 Hz Default Deviation Threshold 400H2 3 Setting Mame 5 LEH2 20 Audible Settings Z0KHz2 1 Inaudible Settings Test Signal Level 36 0 4 dBFs os t oos waveform Sine Wave SIN Advanced Options Setup Time 0 50 t sec Bandwidth Jo o2 t Dwell Time 0 25 4 sec Test Type audible Setup Add Setting Del Setting Cancel Figure 15 9 Edit Test Signals Window e The Edit Test Signals window can be broken down into five different sections These sections are listed here and discussed in greater detail in the following paragraphs e The Title Bar is the blue area at the very top of the window which contains general information pertaining to the whole window e The Test Settings list box the Add Setting button and the Del Setting button e The Test Data group box at the top right of the window e The Advanced Options group box at the bottom right These options require that the current user to have the Contigure Adv Test Params permission under Titan DLL in IED s Password Manger and may not be visible for all users e On the right at the bottom of the window are the OK and Cancel buttons Title Bar In addition to the window name the title bar at the top of the Auto Test Configuration window displays the following information about the amplifier
197. ignal e Clear All Mute All The function of these buttons toggles with each press When it displays Clear All clicking it will uncheck all checkboxes for all channels above the button When it displays Mute All clicking it will check all checkboxes above the button 57 Will TED Chapter 3 Titan IPAU Config Tool annie tectonic vests GEE Normal Bypass e EQ Check this box to bypass the EQ object in the DSP for each channel e Delay Check this box to bypass the Delay object in the DSP tor each channel e Clear All Bypass All The function of these buttons toggles with each press When it displays Clear All clicking it will uncheck all checkboxes for all channels above the button When it displays Bypass All clicking it will check all checkboxes above the button CI Hard Bypass This function applies to legacy systems and is not applicable to newer Titan frames When checked this will completely remove the Delay object in the DSP from the signal path instead of placing the object in bypass using the Normal Bypass function This was used for frames that did not have internal memory installed to use the delay function New frames ship with the memory pre installed and have eliminated the need to adjust this setting e Clear All Bypass AIl The function of these buttons toggles with each press When it displays Clear All clicking it will uncheck all checkboxes for all channels above the button When it displays Bypass All clic
198. ignal chain where audio levels can be measured For Titan series amplifier frames there are four test points per channel additional points may be available in some cases These points are grouped by channel and each channel group is delineated by alternating light blue and white backgrounds Information about the tour test points in Titan amplifier frame is provided in the following list Ambient Out The Ambient Out point allows signal measurement atter all digital signal processing is complete but prior to the signal being converted to analog for amplification Amp Input The Amp Input point allows signal measurement after the signal is converted to analog but before amplification Amp Output The Amp Output point allows measurement of the audio signal after amplification The values measured on this point are affected by the load and condition of the speaker circuit Speaker Current The Speaker current point is measured at the same place in the signal chain as the Amp Output point but is a current measurement rather than a voltage measurement Changes in the speaker circuit s load usually result in noticeable changes in the value measured at this min JED Knnovative Electronic Besigne 00 Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto Test Configuration point The text in the header rows provides organizational descriptions of the data in the grid s columns The header row for the first two columns simply show one title per column but header rows for th
199. ill instruct the application to reload the data trom the database It is useful if other users may be logged into the system at other client workstations Selecting this will ensure that the data displayed is current A shortcut key for this teature is available by using the F5 key Close This option will exit the Enterprise sottware application Edit Add New This menu allows new system components to be added to the sottware application so they can be contigured for proper integration in the system Edit Tools Help BW add New A Edit Selected ka Delete Selected Figure 1 12 Edit Menu Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter l Overview Group Components can be organized into Groups to provide a more user friendly presentation of the overall system architecture All systems should have at least one 1 group This will make it easier to expand the system in the future Additional groups can be added within a main group to further sub divide the system Typically a group is created for each announcement controller in an installation and corresponds with the physical location or areas served by that system For example if a facility consists of two buildings each with its own dedicated announcement controller then a group will be created for each building Device Devices are added to groups or to other devices New devices are added as children to the currently selected device or group in the tree view and that
200. ination tab Play to this Zonemap Select this option to play the message to the Zone Group selected from the droplist box OK Select this button to play the message Cancel Select this button close the window and return to the PDRP Editor without playing the message 136 Wia JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter Q PDRP Messages General Tab PDRP Editor x General Languages User Groups Play Schedule Assemble Take Destination Entry Code Description renter description Priority Terminal v Audio Level Offset 0 dB 15 to 6 Enable Monitoring Enable Partial Activation Figure 9 9 PDRP Editor General Tab Entry Code This is the identifier for the message and the code used when playing the message trom a microphone station or external control device This value must be in the detined range tor PDRP Messages which is usually 1701 through 1799 A pop up balloon window will appear with the valid entry code range when the mouse pointer is moved over the entry code field Description This tield is used to enter a meaningtul name for this message e g Curbside No Smoking No Parking Audio Level Offset This is used to adjust the volume level for the entire message This can provide as much as 15dB of attenuation to reduce the level of messages that appear to be too loud Messages that are not loud enough can have their gain boosted here by as much as 6dB En
201. ing Room IPAU 10 2 131 125 20096 T E anit Double click on this icon to open the Channel Set lings window Channel Test Meter Bridge Settings Cards Channels 42 gt Card 1 Enabled r Channel 1A 9 Gate C4 LY Channel 1B 10 Gate CS Card 2 Enabled F Channel 24 1 1 Ticketing Area ST Channel 26 12 Baggage Claim A Card 3 Enabled LY Channel 34 13 Baggage Claim B Double click on an individual channel and the Channel Settings window will open with that channel already selected Figure 2 1 Accessing Titan Channel Settings Settings Mismatch There are times when the window shown in will appear This indicates that the settings in the frame are different than those in the database Three options are available in this case e Copy database to frame This option will send all settings from the database to the frame This is useful when a frame has been replaced or has received a firmware update e Copy frame to database This option will retrieve the settings from the frame and upload them to the database e Cancel This option will cancel the action and close the Channel Settings window Settings Mismatch Settings in the database data do not match settings in the Frame what would you like to do Copy database to frame Copy Frame to database Figure 2 2 Settings Mismatch Dialog Window The Channel Settings window is shown in Figure 2 3 18 Will TED I
202. ing and dragging either one laterally Class Droplist Box This is only available tor Hi Pass and Lo Pass filter types The mathematical function used to calculate the filter is selected by picking an available type from the droplist box There are three available class types listed below e Butterworth 25 Will TED Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Innovative Electronic Designs e Bessel e Linkwitz Riley Slope dB Oct Droplist Box This is only available tor Hi Pass and Lo Pass filter types This value determines the frequency roll off rate tor the filter in decibels per octave Available values range trom a shallow 6 dB Octave to a very steep 48 dB Octave Bypass EQ Button When activated button removes the effects of all filter bands trom the signal path without resetting the filters to a tlat response curve When the EQ is bypassed the signal will pass through the object without any moditications to the trequency characteristics Gain Slider Edit Box The EQ provides a small range of gain adjustment in order to compensate for the overall ettect of the EQ curve and allow signal to noise ration and dynamic range to be maximized This gain is set by adjusting the slider or entering a value in or relative dB in the edit box The control can be adjusted to provide a range trom 6dB of attenuation to 6dB of gain Set Flat button This button resets all filters to a gain setting of OdB flat response and sorts the filt
203. ing in the same zone Local zone groups are contined to the announcement controller in which they are detined Emergency 901 950 By detault these are the highest priority announcement and therefore will override any other announcement in the system These are used tor emergency announcements such as tire evacuation or weather alerts Unless used as a PDRP message emergency zone groups are always live and are global to all announcement controllers in the system Location A description of the zone group that is typically the physical location of the area e g Gate 1A Concourse B or Ticketing User Groups A list of checkboxes used to detine which user permission groups may access use this zone group Ita user is not assigned to a user group that is associated with a zone group here and attempts to page to this zone group the mic station will indicate an error Destination Tab The Destination tab See h SectionTitle on page 1 18 is where zones are assigned to the zone group 117 Will TED Chapter Zone Group Setup Innovative Electronic Designs 118 Zone Group Editor x General Destination Entry Code p7 ACS 1 A East ACS 2 Terminal C ACS 3 Terminal F ACS 4 A west a4 gt 9 if 2 33 41 49 5 65 73 81 89 97 105 113 10 168 260 C634 C642 CCG GCA COZ ee 106 114 11 19 2f 35 43 Si 59 Gf 7 683 91 99 107 115 12 20 28 36 44 52 60 68 76 84 92 100 116 93 101 109 it 22 30 38 46 S
204. ion Click this field to open a drop down of all analog zones configured tor the ACS Select the appropriate zone to associate with this monitor point Device Click this tield to open a drop down list to identity which point in the signal chain is represented by the monitor point The available devices are as follows e ACS Output e Equalizer Output e 540 Output e Amplifier Circuit e Speaker Circuit e DC Circuit 215 Will TED Chapter 14 596 Series Test Configuration tnnevative tleetromte pestare 216 e Remote Monitoring Circuit ID Enter a logical text description of the monitor point Mon Check this box to make the point available tor audible monitoring through the local rack mount monitor speaker Only audio points should be checked DC voltage points e g power supply monitoring points should not be checked 150 Include the monitor point in the 150 Hz audible test 500 Include the monitor point in the 500 Hz audible test 800 Include the monitor point in the 800 Hz audible test 4K Include the monitor point in the 4 kHz audible test 8K Include the monitor point in the 8 kHz audible test Note Only one audible tone may be selected per monitor test point 20K Include the monitor point in the 20k periodic inaudible test This test is typically executed every 60 seconds The interval between tests is configured in the section about Monitor Test on page 227 Clear Point Click
205. ion on background processes which prevent editing such as make permanent min JED Knnovative Electronic veston 00 Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto Test Configuration When the cursor is held over one of the header rows in the Test Results Grid the center text section displays the date and time of the most recent results for the test specific to the column under the mouse It the cursor is held over a specitic point additional intormation regarding that point may be displayed The possible additional intormation is detailed in the tollowing list e Not Set The point does not have a valid set value Generally the Set column for the point in the Test Results Grid will also have a yellow background e Not tested in last test The point has a valid set value but does not have a valid result trom the last run of the test This is rare and usually indicates that OK results are not being saved for the test only bad results See the Edit Test Schedules window tor more intormation e Not selected for test The point is not configured as part of the test In other words it is not checked in the Auto Test Configuration window s point selection grid The right most text section displays the currently logged in user or the words Not Logged In it no user is logged in The lett most graphic section indicates whether or not the Auto Tests window is correctly communicating with the database A green light indicates good communicatio
206. iple user companies by holding down the CTRL key while clicking 2 Click the Delete button located on the toolbar 3 Click the Yes button to delete the selected company or companies 82 min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 5 Mic Station Security Note The Cancel or No button can be clicked at any time to cancel the delete operation and return to the viewer form Print This option interfaces with the IED Print Manager software to open up the print preview window containing all the Company data Refer to the IED Print Manager section for more information on this feature 83 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 5 Mic Station Security Mic Station Users 84 The Mic Station Users section is used to prevent unauthorized access to mic stations that are contigured to be locked and require login before operation Mic Station Users are accessed by double clicking on the Mic Station Users icon Figure 5 14 in the Enterprise sottware This brings up the Mic Station Viewer Figure 5 15 that lists all users that are currently contigured in the system Mic Station Users are global to all announcement controllers in the system Figure 5 14 Mic Station Users Icon Steps to modity existing data or to add new ones are described in the appropriate sections below The toolbar at the top of the viewer provides the ability to add edit delete or print users add 3 Edt Mic Station Users
207. it refer to the Monitor Zone on page 222 Caution Executing a system wide test will block all non emergency operations from being performed on the system 900 series emergency messages or live announcements will override the set operation Monitor Testing xl General Audible ones Mic TestZone set lest 1 Manual Tests System wide Tests C Mics Automatic Testing Complete System Test Automatically Test 11 18 Time 20K Test Automatically Test Ever fi minutes Mics and Bus Circuits E Mics Bus and Ckts f 20K Test Status Figure 14 14 Monitor Test 230 iil JED innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 14 596 Series Test Configuration Manual Tests Select the type of system wide test to pertorm when the Start button is pressed e Mics Test all 500 and 508 series microphone stations in the system e Mics and Bus Test all 500 and 508 series microphone stations in the system plus all 500R busses e Circuits Test all audio output circuits in the system e Mics Bus and Ckts Test all three of the above items together e 20K Test Execute a manual 20K test Start button Click this button to execute the type of test selected in the System Wide Tests button selection group Automatic Testing These options determine the automatic behavior of the available system tests Complete System Test When the box is checked
208. k Updating of Mic Stations A special feature exists tor transferring multiple templates to different mic stations in a single bulk transter process This provides a taster transter method when multiple templates have already been created tor mic stations in a system Execute a Bulk Update 1 Open the Actions menu and select the Update Database and Devices item This will open the bulk update window as shown in Figure 6 19 The upper window lists all mic stations available in the system Update Database and Devices x Check a mic to send assigned templates to that mic Click on template column to change a template Template o 3 1 Training Room Equipment Rack IED Training Room 10 2 131 130 O 10 1 Gate C4 Jetway IED Training Room 10 2 131 131 Oo 11 1 Gate C4 Ticket Counter IED Training Room 10 2 131 132 Check an ACS to send templates for that ACS _ Num Description Training Room Titan ACS 10 2 131 121 10 2 131 122 Training Room Legacy ACS 10 2 131 111 10 2 131 112 Figure 6 19 Update Database and Devices Window 2 Assign a template to a mic station by clicking on the template name for the mic station in the Template column This will open a droplist box of available templates in the system 3 Repeat step 2 to assign a template to each mic station as needed 4 Check the box next to each mic station to update 5 Click the Update Mics button to transfer the templates to the selected mic stations 105 Will TED
209. k the Send to Mics button in the toolbar to open the transfer selection window as shown in Figure 6 17 This window will display all announcement controllers and the mic stations available in a tree view Each announcement controller can be expanded or closed by clicking the or next to the checkbox Send IED Training Room to mics Check mics to send Training Room Titan ACS Training Room Equipment Rack Gate C4 Jetway Gate C4 Ticket Counter C Training Room Legacy ACS Send Cancel Figure 6 17 Transfer Window 3 Select the mic stations in the system that will receive the template by checking the box next to that mic station Selecting the check box next to an announcement controller will select all of its mic stations 4 Click the Send button to begin the transfer process Note An IP address must be assigned to the mic station in Enterprise for this process to work Ifan IP address is not present or a broadcast address is not associated with the announcement controller then a prompt will appear tor a broadcast address as shown in Figure 6 18 It prompted enter the broadcast address tor the announcement controller to begin the transter 104 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 6 528 Interface Designer Mic IP Address x Please enter a broadcast address for this ACS ACS 1 Training Room Titan ACS Ok Cancel Figure 6 18 Enter Broadcast Address Window Bul
210. ke the necessary changes to the data on the form To edit the actual audio of the take click the Edit Take button located on the Record Play Take tab 7 Click the OK button to save the changes and close the window on a a a Note The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to discard changes and return to the viewer form Delete Click the Delete button to remove the selected take trom the system The user is prompted for confirmation Figure 10 7 before the selected record is erased In addition to erasing one record at atime multiple takes can be selected at once Select multiple messages by holding down the CTRL key while clicking on the records Click the Delete button after all selections have been made x a Are you sure you want to delete selected record s 4 Ho Cancel i Figure 10 7 Delete Confirmation Dialog Box Delete a Take 1 Click on the Takes icon from the Enterprise Navigator window to open the viewer 2 Select the appropriate filter type in the Filter By drop down menu 3 Highlight a take in the viewer window or select multiple zones by holding down the CTRL key while clicking 4 Click the Delete button located on the toolbar 5 Click the Yes button to delete the selected take s The Cancel or No buttons can be clicked at any time to cancel the delete operation and return to the viewer form Wia JED ronevetive Hlectromte mestang 0000 Chapter 10 Takes Filter Cl
211. king it will check all checkboxes above the button 58 Wia JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 3 Titan PAU Contig Tool BGM Tab This tab is used to configure the background music BGM routing for the Titan frame Zi Titan IPAU Config Tool Oj x Application Actions Help mi amp wy IP Address 10 20 10 11 Set Date M Perm Reset Flt Sft Reset Fctry Dft 7 Reload Data after Set Reset O General Network Zone Atten amp Backup Mute amp Bypass BGM Standard ACS BGM m Local BGM Reload Data i vj Frame Defaults fs Bus Input 17 z Gain f0 0 Send Data M Cobranet Settings M Channel BGM inputs Receive BGM From 4 B Cobranet Receiver ji re 1 zo Local BGM zo Local BGM Cobranet Chan e ii zo Local BGM x 20 Local BGM Pota Pem ao RE 3 20 Local BGM 20 Local Bam 7 fi7 Bus Input 17 7 4 zo Local BGM 20 Local BGM Note Changing the BGM Rx Bus will result in audio not being routed to the bus previously 5 zo Local BGM Z zo Local BGM gt assigned to the selecte Receiver Channel combination 6 zo Local BGM 20 Local BGM Also any pre existing Receiver Channel assignments for the newly selected bus willbe 7 20 Local BGM 7 20 Local BGM z cleared Finally these changes apply only to the currently 8 zo Local BGM X 20 Local BGM selected Receiver Channel and Set All To Lo
212. lay and record audio as well as access the application s configuration options Figure 11 24 shows the items available on the Tools menu Tools Help Configuration Play All H Play Selected gt stop gt Pause Resume Record From ACS Mic Station Retrieve DA Lisk From 405 Figure 1 1 24 Tools Menu 176 Wim JED Innovative Electronic Designs Configuration Chapter 1 1 DRP Editor Select this option to open the configuration window as show in Figure 11 25 This window allows setting up of the behavior of the DRP Editor regarding retrieval and playback of takes the mic station to use to record etc The window is divided into two tabs each described in detail below Configuration Ea Take Play Record Temporary Take File take9975 dax Location of DAX Files retrieved from ACS C Development DRP Editor Te Delete retrie ved DA files on exit J Download take to dual CPUs where applicable Take Plotting HM Number determines the quality of the graph produced Setting it to lower numbers will yeild higher quality output at the expense of speed Setting it to SO or higher will increase the speed at which the graphs are drawn but at reduced detail r Figure 11 25 Configuration Window Take Tab Take Tab i Cancel e Temporary Take File The filename used to temporarily save the take on the ACS when using the ACS for playback e
213. lected Center Freq Hz Edit Box The center frequency or cutoff frequency of the filter is set by entering a numeric value in the edit box The frequency parameter can also be changed with the SHIFT LEFT ARROW and SHIFT RIGHT ARROW key combinations or dragging the center triangle above the graph laterally lett or right Gain dB Edit Box This is only available tor Peaking and Notch filter types The filter gain is set by entering a numeric value using or values for relative dB in the edit box The gain can also be changed with the ALT UP ARROW and ALT DOWN ARROW key combinations A quick but less precise method ot editing is pertormed by clicking and dragging the green dot for the filter up or down in the frequency response graph Bandwidth Oct Edit Droplist Box This is only available tor Peaking and Notch filter types The filter bandwidth is set by entering a numeric value in the edit box or selecting a pre detined value trom the list The value used is measured in Octaves For example ita 1 3 octave filter is required then a value of 0 333 would be used Several common bandwidths are available tor selection in the list that can be accessed by slicking on the down arrow on the droplist box The bandwidth can also be altered using CTRL LEFT ARROW and CTRL RIGHT ARROW key combinations The two exterior triangles located at the top of the frequency response graph also change the bandwidth by click
214. list to open the Zone Editor window for that zone add zones Zone EE BE J4 js Je La ja 19 J10 Aii 12 J 13 J 14 Edit Location d card d card d card d card d card d card d card d card titan titan titan titan titan titan gt e Delete Filter D Card Zone D Card Zone D Card Zone D Card Zone D Card Zone D Card Zone D Card Zone D Card Zone Titan Digital Titan Digital Titan Digital Titan Digital Titan Digital Titan Digital Figure 8 3 Zones Viewer Toolbar Gutput To Device BigReg Titan BigReg Titan BigReg Titan BigReg Titan BigReg Titan BigRteg Titan OK 40 Record s E The toolbar located at the top of the Zones Viewer provides quick access to the commands needed to add edit or delete zones 121 Will TED Chapter 8 Zone Setup Innovative Electronic Designs 122 Add Click the Add button to open the Zone Editor with a new zone entry as shown in Figure 8 4 Zone Editor x General Zone Type Specific Additional Properties Owned By ACS 510CPU 1 D Card Zone Location JV Enable this zone Zone Number s Enter zone number s and or zone ranges seperated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 1 If an existing zone Falls in a zone range the data For that zone will be unaffected Only new records are created in this process OK Cancel Figure 8 4 Zone Editor New Zo
215. ll clicking it will check all checkboxes in this section CEA 7 ones This assigns the paging zone number to each channel ENTERPRISE 8 Click this button to increase the zone number assigned to each zone by 8 ENTERPRISE 8 Click this button to decrease the zone number assigned to each zone by 8 Set All Click this button to set the channel attenuation value for all channels to the value typed into the entry box immediately to the right of the button GAL Backup Amp Mode This setting controls the behavior of the backup amplitier e Off No Backup This setting indicates that a backup amplifier card is not present in the trame e Auto Backup Amp Normally Off Default This mode will turn the power on to the backup amplitier card only when it is used The tront panel power switch must remain in the on position at all times and the trame will control power to the card e Auto Backup Normally On This mode will allow the backup amplitier card to always remain on when the front panel power switch is on e Manual When this mode is set the backup amplifier will only be switched in when a command is sent trom control software external to the frame 56 mijn JED innovative Eteetronte Designs 00000 Chapter 3 Titan IPAU Contig Tool Mute amp Bypass Tab This tab provides the ability to mute the direct inputs or BGM channel for each individual amplitier channel This also provides the ability to bypass the EQ a
216. ll Box Properties When a scroll box is selected on the treeview its properties are edited using the controls displayed on the right side of the application window as shown in Figure 6 15 File Edit Actions Help amp Ne Open Save Delete Template Template Template Template Template Name IMPORTED IED Training Room Enable Keypad T El Button Bar Enter Claim Number Enter Gate Number Next Departure ox O B R Send To Show Preview Add Delete Move Move Add Delete Mics Window Button Button ButtonUp Button Down ScrollBox Scroll Box Scroll Box Title Select Message I Fixed Width 20 Arival Message Pause Sequence Repeat Last Departure Select Seq Step Add FAS Language Change Sequence Flight Delayed Flight Cancelled Flight Gate Change Flight Messages Local Gate Areas General Messages Security Breach Mute System UnMute System Log Out All Terminals E Scroll Boxes Select Flight Message Select Message Select Delay Message Select Cancel Message Security Breach Messages Terminals Background Colors Text Colors Items Drag and drop items to change position Preview All items shown Scroll Up Scroll Down Title Item __ Selected Item M Title C Item Selected Item Text Action Type Action Data Curbside Parkin Enty Code xt 1741 p No Smoking in Airport Entry Code 1742 Unattended Baggage Entry Code 1743 Ir Weather Warning Entry Code
217. ll be shown on a visual paging display It is important that this time be correct and is manually entered by typing a value directly in the entry box The length of a take can be found by using the DRP Editor window 157 Will TED Chapter 10 Takes Innovative Electronic Designs 158 Take Text Type the text of the message into this box The text in this box will be displayed when the take is being recorded so the user can read the message word tor word while recording It is also used to generate a visual message VIS tile that is transterred to the announcement controller to use the take for visual messages Text must be entered into the Take Text field before proceeding to the next step Record Play Take Tab system wide Take Record Play Take vis m Play To ACS Play the audio out to the local 4CS associated J with this 590 computer Play to Zone Group Play M Record Take Audio Record audio for the take via the mic station Use Mic Station Edit Take fio Gate C4 Jetway Show Text Mic Station Status Ready Record M Text To Speech Convert the text in the Take Text field into ip speech via the text to speech engine Create TTS Distribute DAX File gt Distribute the take audio created on the local ACS to all other 4C5s in the system ue OK Cancel Figure 10 11 Takes Editor Record Play Take Tab Play To ACS e Play to Zone Group Select th
218. llow tor the signal generator to settle into a consistent signal Dwell Time This spin edit controls the amount of time the system waits atter selecting a point betore measurement is made to allow any noise generated by switching points to dissipate Bandwidth This spin edit controls the bandwidth of the bandstop and bandpass filters used when measurement is made if any Test Type This drop list box allows provides the system with some additional information used to better tune specific tests In general the following rules should be used to determine this setting e 20K Setup Select this option for inaudible tones e Audible Setup Select this option for audible tones e Pgm Mute Bnd Pass Select this option only when it is necessary to mute the program audio during the test e None This option is reserved for factory use 253 Will TED Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto TestConfiguration _nnevative Electronic Designs OK The OK button saves any changes which have been made and then closes the window Cancel The Cancel button discards any changes which have been and closes the window 254 Win JED Knnovative Electronic veston 00 Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto Test Configuration Edit Test Schedules Window The Edit Test Schedules Window see Figure 15 10 allows for the creation deletion and scheduling of test sequences Test sequences are usually referred to simply as tests The two terms test seq
219. mation Allow VisDID Immediate to fill only half of true fill half screen lt halfscreen gt lt stayontop gt lt scrollrate gt lt timerinterval gt lt compressratio gt the detined screen false fill whole screen Control VisDID Immediate s on top status in relation to other applications true stay on top VisDID Immediate always resides on top false do not stay on top of VisDID Continuous integer representing the number of pixels the screen is to scroll during each timer interval see below integer representing the number of milliseconds to wait between each scrolling shitt operation Floating point representing the aspect ratio of the screen i e a stretch ratio 1 0 means no stretching Wim JED Knmovative Electronic Destans O Chapter 17 VisDID Setup Tag Definition Value justCenter scrolling text will be centered justRight scrolling text will be aligned with the left border of the screen string representing the default lt justitication gt justification scheme to apply to the scrolling text justLeff scrolling text will be aligned with the right border of the screen Floating point representing the default number of seconds to hold a line on the screen if no timer information is given lt holdtimeperchar gt e g if the holdtimeperchar is set to 0 1 and a single line of an untimed message is 30 characters long that particular line will stay on scr
220. mation used for the Control Network Port This setting is usually set to 0 0 0 0 as the frame is not connected via a router e Set Click this button to send the data for the Control Network Port to the frame GAID Pima Network Port This is the main CobraNet port used by the frame to transmit and receive both control and audio over the network e P Address This is the IP address information for the Primary Network Port e Net Mask This is the Subnet Mask information for the Primary Network Port 99 Will TED Chapter 3 Titan IPAU Config Tool annie tectonic pastas e Default Router This is the default router information used for the Primary Network Port This setting is usually set to 0 0 0 0 as the trame is not connected via a router e Set Click this button to send the data for the Primary Network Port to the frame CGA secondary Network Port This is used to control the optional second CobraNet interface module in the frame This should not be contused with what is often reterred to as the backup CobraNet port available on the module This redundant port is not brought to the backplane of the unit The settings for the Secondary Network Port should only be configured when the second interface module is installed e P Address This is the IP address intormation for the Secondary Network Port e Net Mask This is the Subnet Mask information for the Secondary Network Port e Default Router This is the default router inf
221. me Settings Logged In Hardy Martin Figure 1 17 Print Manager PasswordManagerConfig exe This application is used to add and remove users in the system The system provides very detailed control of user permissions Individual user accounts can be granted access to areas of the application that directly pertain to their specitic system usage needs A log is kept that includes who logged in when and specitically what they changed Will TED Chapter l Overview Innovative Electronic Designs Password Manager Config fa App Mgmt Contig Verify Edit Accts Ching Pi Current User Jikleiman Figure 1 18 Password Manager Contig Help Currently the only option available trom the Help menu is the About information window as shown in Figure 1 20 This window provides the version number and release date of the Enterprise sottware application Help rh Figure 1 19 Help Menu About IED Enterprise IED Enterprise 2 0 0 0 4 8 2009 Innovative Electronic Designs 9701 Taylorsville Road Louisville KY 40299 Copyright cl 2006 9 Innowative Electronic Designs LLC All Rights Reserved DLL versions Figure 1 20 About Window Note It is important to remember that the Enterprise suite of software represents a collection of many different small applications that are accessed trom the overall IED Enterprise shell application This version information displays the major installatio
222. mum level increase is determined by the Gain Range slider 27 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Attenuation Mode ee onc Figure 2 13 Automatic Attenuation Mode Slave This mode will cause the selected channel to follow the ambient noise compensation settings of another channel Using this setting allows multiple outputs on the same T9160 trame to be adjusted by a single sensor or a gang of sensors This setting is usetul in very large spaces where multiple amplifier channels are required due to the power load requirements of the loudspeaker lines Attenuation Mode C Fixed C Automatic 10 Gate 5 sigh Sensors H7 gt gt a 11 Ticketing Area 2B 12 Baggage Claim 4 sensors Gain Calc Filten34 13 Baggage Claim B 3B 14 Upper Curbside Threshold Scaling Fast 44 15 Lower Curbside 100 constant 16 Concourse A Figure 2 14 Slave Attenuation Mode Note A channel can only be slaved to a channel that is located in the same T9160 mainframe Program This level meter displays the real time audio signal level at the input of the Ambient Analysis object as shown on the digital signal flow This signal is post EQ and post delay but does not have the test signal Sensors Level This level meter displays the real time sound pressure level SPL trom the ambient noise sensor Note This level is
223. n release and it is possible that other tiles on the system have been updated and the core IED Enterprise shell application will remain at the same revision level 10 mijn JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 1 Overview Toolbar The toolbar provides quick access to several menu commands that are commonly accessed Add New Delete Selected 7 Logout elx Login Logout Edit Selected Reload Data Figure 1 21 Enterprise Navigator Window Toolbar Login Logout The text on this button will change to reflect the available command If the user is currently logged into the system this button will become a Logout button If currently logged out it will change to a Login button Selecting this button is the same as selecting Login Logout from the Application menu Selecting Login will prompt the user to enter their user name and password Note The actions associated with the next three buttons will be applied to the currently selected item in the Tree View Add New This button allows the user to add a new group or a new item under the currently selected tree branch Edit Selected This button will open the specific properties editor for the selected device Delete Selected This button will delete the selected object and all child objects associated with this object The system will prompt for confirmation to delete the item to avoid accidental deletion Caution This action is permanent and will delete all
224. nce Previous Next buttons These allow quick navigation to the previous or next zone group without exiting the window If any changes have been made to the zone group a prompt will appear as shown in Figure 7 6 Zone Setup Zones are the actual outputs on a system Typically zones are the outputs trom the system that deliver announcements program material and or background material to the physical space in a facility Zones are also used to define other types of system outputs as well such as visual displays relays multi ACS channels data channels etc The tollowing sections describe adding zones to an announcement controller TAT G p a Ta ee ne ee ne eT eT eee ne Pee Eee Tee ewe aes Cee eee 120 ZONES VEW arei usie een cnc Se ett de a tana aaa 3b ese A aA a 121 Joe IRON seh heh a a a fen Eon a aa a a aerea aey 126 Cenerd lek ho oa nee aeea a oRR HEY DPCP eR IRR ot eee PRN 126 Zone Type Specific Tab _ _ 2 2 22 2 e eee cece eee eeeeeceeceeeees 127 Additional Properties Vain os sews aes eid ie oe 128 119 Will TED Chapter8 ZoneSetup TT Oomen teetromte pestane Zones Zones are defined for each announcement controller in the system All zones are accessed from the Zones icon in Enterprise as shown in Figure 8 1 i 18 x E IED Enter prise Application Edit Tools Help ja x 2 Logout H on BigRed ACS Specific Tasks H acs stocru f Y Mic Stations i S10N 1 Mics Zones W
225. ncourse 4 Zone Number 20 Description Terminal B Add Zone Map to Time Talker Figure 12 10 Zone Map Setup Zone Number This is a Zone Group number as defined in Enterprise to use as a zone map in Time Talker Description This is a text description for this zone map to aid in configuring time events 190 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 12 Time Talker Add Zone Map to Time Talker Click this button to add the zone number and description to Time Talker OK Click this button to save the changes and close the window Cancel Click this button to discard any changes and close the window User Options The User Options window is accessed through the Edit menu It provides controls to determine when Time Talker will be active and inactive as well as how it will operate y IED Time Talker Config Options l oj x Time Format On Error Retry 12 Hour Format oana C 24 Hour Format J Announce AM PM Play Chimes Yes C No Start Time Stop Time Next Day J Monday 6 00AM All Day 11 30 PM n MV Tuesday 6 00AM All Day 11 30 PM V Wednesday 6 00 AM All Day f 1 30 PM M Thursday 6 00AM All Day 11 30 PM A Friday 6 00AM AlDa 11 30 PM V Saturday fi 2 00 AM All Day f 1 59 PM M Sunday 12 00 AM All Day 11 59 PM Time nnouncement Prefix C The Current Local Time is The Local Time is Hours Of Operation o_o o_o I
226. nd Delay objects in the DSP signal tlow it they are not required for the installation Titan IPAU Config Tool loj x pplication Actions Help fi oss E Ww IP Address 10 20 10 11 Set Date M Perm Reset Flt Sft Reset Fetry Dflt 7 Reload Data after Set Reset O General Network Zone Aten amp Backup Mute amp Bypass scm Mute Normal Bypass Hard Bypass Reload Data M Direct In BGM In m EQ Delay Delay B B amp B 4 B B Cadi M iv E B a E E T E Cad2 M N M Iv E E E ES Cad3 M iv M Iv E E E E E E adladd mum ay y Mutes cadS5 M iv M Iv E E E E u E Card6 M iv M Iv E E E E E E Cad M iv M iv E E Bw i E E Note Normal ld dl ad a oo ll s Hard Bypasses Clear All Clear All Bypass al Bypass al Bypass al are on Figure 3 6 Mute amp Bypass Tab The controls on this tab are as follows Reload Data Click this button to retrieve the data from the trame necessary to populate all tields on this tab Send Data Click this button to send the data on the tab to the frame CGL 6 car Hidden Mutes Click this button to clear any mutes that are not visible trom IPAU tool GHD vute e Direct In Check this box tor each channel to mute the direct in located on the back of the frame It is recommended that all direct inputs be muted when not in use to reduce residual noise e BGM In Check this box for each channel to mute the BGM s
227. ne Add New Zone Note a S S The steps necessary to add a new zone to the system are as follows Refer to the Zone Editor on page 126 for details on the Zone Editor window Click on the Zones icon trom the Enterprise Navigator window to open the Zones Viewer Click the Add button to open the Zone Editor window Select the Type for the zone Enter a description of the zone in the Location entry box Check the Enable this zone box to make the zone active This can be left unchecked if this zone will be activated at a later time Enter the number for the zone in the Zone Number s entry box Multiple zones can be added at one time by typing a between numbers to indicate a range e g 5 12 or use commas to separate multiple zones e g 5 7 9 Ifthe number or range includes a zone that already exists that zone will be excluded from the addition and its data will not be changed Click the Zone Type Specific tab and edit as required See page 127 Click the Additional Properties tab and edit as required Click the OK button to save the changes and close the window The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to discard changes and return to the viewer form min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 8 Zone Setup Edit Click the Edit button to open the editor window for the zone highlighted in the viewer Alternatively double clicking on a zone in the viewer will also open the editor Zone Edito
228. ne group that was not contigured with the American Airlines user group This ensures that the end users have paging access to designated areas only Similarly it a user is not a member of an emergency message user group then they cannot initiate emergency messages associated with that user group User Groups are accessed by double clicking on the User Groups icon as shown in Figure 5 1 in the Enterprise sottware atter highlighting selecting an announcement controller on the TreeView This brings up the User Groups Viewer Figure 5 2 that lists all user groups that are setup in the system Figure 5 1 User Groups Icon A system is typically shipped with a few default user groups e g All Call All Call Emergency etc Steps to modity existing user groups or to add new ones are described in the appropriate sections below The toolbar at the top of the viewer provides the ability to add edit delete or print user groups add 9 Edit 3 Delete gt Print User Groups Description _ American Airlines _ Delta Air Lines _ United Airlines J US Airways _ Delta Connection J Southwest Airlines _ Hawaiian Airlines J sol J Fas _ Island Air _ Continental Airlines _ Alaska Airlines Ok 33 Record s A Figure 5 2 User Groups Viewer 76 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 5 Mic Station Security Add Click the Add button to open the User Group Editor with a blank torm a
229. ne user group for the mic station must match a user group assigned to the PDRP message to allow the mic station access to this message When logins are enabled the mic station user must belong to the same user group as the message Check all groups that apply to this message Languages This selects the languages tor this message At least one language must be selected betore proceeding to the Assemble Take tab The languages selected here will change the language tabs available on the Assemble Take tab The order of playback tor messages using multiple languages is determined by the order in the list from top to bottom The position of each language in the list is controlled by the buttons located to the right of the list e Top Move the selected language to the top of the list Up Move the selected language up one position in the list Down Move the selected language down one position in the list Bottom Move the selected language to the bottom of the list Play Schedule Tab The Play Schedule tab is used to define number of plays for a message when it is triggered trom a mic station or to put it on a schedule PDRP Editor x General Languages User Groups Play Schedule Assemble Take Destination C Unlimited Plays eececcesecceseseeccceseeesoceeseeccsseeceseseessoseee Minutes Between Plays a E Use the following Schedulefs originating From Training Room Titan ACS Start Time stop Tine Star bate Stop
230. ng zone groups as well as add new ones T Jad Edt X Delete f Fiter CS Print Zone Groups Entry Code Lacation US AIRWAYS GATE CONCOURSE Terminal Zone Groups US AIRWAYS GATES CONCOURSE TICKETING Terminal Zone Groups BAGGAGE B C Terminal Zone Groups US AIRWAYS ALL Terminal Zone Groups CONTINET AL GATES CONCOURSE Terminal Zone Groups CONTINENTAL GATES CONCOURSE TICKETING Terminal Zone Groups BAGGAGE D Terminal Zone Groups CONTINENTAL ALL CALL Terminal Zone Groups TERMINAL TEST FROM 1 4 Terminal Zone Groups UNITED GATES CONCOURSE Terminal Zone Groups UNITED GATES CONCOURSE TICKETING Terminal Zone Groups AIR TRAN UNITED BAGGAGE Terminal Zone Groups UNITED ALL CALL Terminal Zone Groups AW ALL CALL Terminal Zone Groups 297 Records E Figure 7 2 Zone Groups Viewer Double click any zone group to open the Zone Group Editor window for that zone group add Edt X Delete 4 Fiter lt gt Print Figure 7 3 Zone Groups Viewer Toolbar The toolbar located at the top of the Zone Groups Viewer provides quick access to the commands needed to add edit or delete zone groups Add Click the Add button to open the Zone Group Editor with a new zone group entry as shown in See h l SectionTitle on page 112 111 Will TED Chapter Zone Group Setup Innovative Electronic Designs 112 Zone Group Editor x ip alid Entry Code Range s 101 199 Zone Group Type 7
231. nge as long as the noise level remains above the threshold but below the amount required to drive the system to maximum level Note The Ambient Analysis algorithm differentiates between program audio and ambient noise level detected by the ambient noise sensor It is possible for the sensor level to be above the threshold with no ambient noise compensation applied when the level detected is program audio trom the system The limit is set by adjusting the slider with the mouse or by manually typing a value in the edit box below the slider using a positive numerical value Ambient Out This level displays the current setting of the Channel Out attenuator as it is being controlled Assign Sensors Clicking on the Assign Sensors button will launch the Ambient Sensor Assignment window as shown in Figure 2 15 This is where one or more ambient sensors are directly assigned to control the currently selected channel Each channel can have one 1 to tour 4 ambient noise sensors assigned When multiple sensors are use the system averages the signal levels trom all assigned sensors to obtain an ambient noise level reading There are three very critical rules related to using multiple ambient noise sensors in a single zone that are described below Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Rules for using multiple sensors for a single zone e Allsensors must be connected to the same sensor collection unit
232. nnovative Electronic Designs Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Channel Settings Training Room IPAU 10 2 131 125 eanan Amplifier Channel Inputs and Zone Manager amp praus 14 9 Gate C4 Model 6472 B 10 Gate Program Source Background Music Source Page Zone E Channel 1B OK 2B 12 Baggage Claim A Aten E level 34 13 Baggage Claim B 4 25 1 Duck Level 25 Duck Level 2951 Zone State Idle 3B 14 Upper Curbside _ _ f20 0 34 15 f20 0 34 d ei Page Bus 0 44 15 Lower Curbside S I 4B 16 Concourse A Page Priority 192 54 17 Concourse B 5B 18 Concourse C 64 19 Security Checkpoint Queing 6B 20 Security Checkpoint po 7A 21 Food Court 7B 22 Rental Car Area V Mute Mute Mute 84 23 Parking Garage 8B 24 Test Zone Logged In hmartin C3 A lo Figure 2 3 Titan Channel Settings Window The available channels and zone assignments are listed in the list box on the lett side of the window Channels are selected by clicking on the channel name in the list Once a channel is selected it can be edited by selecting the appropriate object in the signal flow along the top or from the menus Objects that are not available for the selected channel will appear in a gray color The center section of the window will change to display the controls available for the object selected The top status bar has the name of the currently selected Titan frame and its IP address The bottom st
233. ns and red indicates a problem with database communications The center graphic section indicates whether or not the Auto Tests window is communicating with the amplifier frame A green light indicates good communications and red indicates that the window is not communicating with the trame The right most graphic section becomes animated whenever the software is busy with some background processing 24 Will TED Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto TestConfiguration _nnevative Electronic Designs Point Selection Window The Point Selection window is displayed when either Single Point Test or Test Tone is selected from the Run Tests pop up menu This window see Figure 15 4 allows selection of a specitic point and frequency to be used in the Single Point Test or tor the Test Tone It is necessary to specity a point for the Test Tone so that the system knows which channel should receive the selected tone Only points already contigured as part of the chosen test chosen are available in this window ich System Test please select point and frequency for the Test Tone 7 Chan 14 Amp Output titan zone 9 8 Chan 14 Speaker Current titan zone 9 Chan 1B Amp Output titan zone 10 g 1B Speaker Current titan zone 10 oO J J CO N oT 24 Amp Output titan zone 11 24 Speaker Current titan zone 11 2B Amp Output titan zone 12 2B Speaker Current titan zone 12 34 Amp Output titan 34 Speaker Cur
234. ntrol communication tault or any hardware tailure plus monitor test deviations that affect certain zones e g setting up one such relay per zone or zone map in the system The value in any column may be an asterisk to mean any all an individual value or a range of numbers e g 1 5 as shown in the sample figures below 2 2 mint ED Innovative Electronic pestgng 000 Chapter 16 System Supervision Figure 16 11 Sample Custom Triggers View Mixture 273 Will TED Chapter 1G System Supervision Innovative Electronic Designs IED Network Fault Numbering The table below shows the numbering system used for taults reported by IED devices sottware These values may be needed by the system contigurator when defining tault descriptions or tault relays The basic report is a two byte entity consisting of a Fault Type byte and a Fault Number byte The only values shown are those for 510 520ACS systems and GLOBALcom vACS systems Faults for older 8000 based systems are not included in this table to avoid clutter Table 16 1 Fault Types and Fault Number Meanings Type Name Fault Number Values Mic Station Control Line Failure Mic Station Number Card Component Number ACS Systems Card Type upper 3 bits O C Card 1 D Card 2 R Card 4 N Card Card Slot Number lower 5 bits Titan Frames T9160 IPAU 224 Amplifier Card 1 Fault 225 Amplifier Card 2 Fault 226 Amplifier Card 3 Fault 227 Am
235. number must be unique for a specitic announcement controller Group and must tall within the ranges detined in the system properties tor the announcement controller Location This is descriptive text to describe the location and or function of the mic station i e Gate 1A or AA Ticket Counter Mic Type This is the specitic type model of the mic station The correct type must match the model number of mic station used for this station Activate Mic Station This indicates that this mic station is active when the box is checked This option allows a microphone station to be completely disabled without being deleted from the system When the box is not checked the physical mic station will not function This is useful to temporarily disable a microphone without losing any of its setup information It is also useful to reserve a slot tor future mic stations that will be installed at a later point Lock Mic Station This option enables or disables the lock teature of the mic station When the box is checked users are required to log into the mic station and will have access based on the mic station user permissions When the box is not checked the mic station is available for use by anyone Note This feature is only available for specific types of mic stations and will be disabled when a Mic Type is selected that does not support this feature EPROM Version This teature is enabled only for certain 508 mic station types
236. oller to activate a function e Log Out This sets the button to pertorm the logout function when mic station security is used in a system Caption This is the text that is displayed on the button The character limit of the text is determined by the button width that is detined in the Button Bar section Text will be automatically wrapped to a second line it it does not fit on a single line To force a second line press the ENTER key on the first line at the appropriate break point With the detault button width of 110 pixels the maximum number of characters that will tit on the button is 22 characters a7 Will TED Chapter 6 528 Interface Designer Innovative Electronic Designs Background Color Text Color When the Use Default Colors checkbox is unchecked the background color and text font color can be changed for this button by clicking on the appropriate icon If Use Default Colors is checked this button will use the detault colors selected in the button bar panel Permissions For systems that use mic station security or mic stations that are not locked buttons are shown or hidden based on permissions assigned to each user or mic station Each button has three options e Allow All User Permissions Select this option to grant access to this button for all users e Allow Same User Permissions As Select this option to slave the permissions for a button to those of another button The other button or scroll box to
237. om nine 9 divisions below the OdB point to one 1 division above e Mid Upper Display a range from seven 7 divisions below the OdB point to three 3 divisions above e Center Display a range trom tive 5 divisions below the OdB point to tive 5 divisions above e Mid Lower Display a range trom three 3 divisions below the OdB point to seven 7 divisions above e Bottom Display a range trom one 1 division below the OdB point to nine 9 divisions above 44 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Show Gain When checked a response curve will be shown that shows the combined gain settings tilter response curve for all filters in the EQ object This curve is displayed as a blue line with the values shown on the lett vertical axis Show Phase When checked a phase response curve will also be shown on the trequency response graph to visualize the phase effects that the filters have on the signal This curve is displayed in a light magenta color The vertical axis on the right side of the graph displays the phase values Parametric Equalizer 2 70 KHz Y al z0 31 5 D3 125 Fa 200 LE 2K k BE 12 5K 20K Figure 2 37 EQ Display with Phase Curve 45 This page has been intentionally left blank Titan Channel Configuration 46 Titan IPAU Config Tool The Titan T9160 T9116 and T90xxDSP devices are complex units with built in processors that provid
238. ome message to people arriving to the city for the event The message can be programmed on a schedule that only plays it on the days where they anticipate many arriving passengers that will be attending the event They can even change the message on departure day to play a different message thanking them for their patronage Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 9 PDRP Messages Microphone stations can be programmed to play PDRP messages Access to certain messages is restricted based on a user s level of access when logins are enabled on the mic station Therefore emergency messages can be blocked for general system users but made available only to security personnel Using additional interface hardware messages can be played trom external control devices such as a tire alarm or security panel PDRP messages offer a wide range of system possibilities The following sections describe the method of creating and assembling a PDRP message in the system IED Enterprise oy x Application Edit Tools Help A Logout lO alxi ity Training Room ACS Titan System Sh Training Room Titan ACS 9 Mic Stations a ACS 510N Card Training Room IPAU S wide Tasks EER Training Room 9032NS a 7 W 590 Server Sa r amp A EO lt amp oy Training Room ACS Legacy System Languages Takes FAS Variables Zone Groups Entry Code R Mic Station Sh Training Room Legacy ACS Definitions Messages ttings
239. ompany Editor Add New Add New Company The steps necessary to add a new Company are as follows 1 Click the Add button in the Company Viewer 2 Enter a meaningful description or name of the new Company Only the first 16 characters of the description will be displayed on the 508 or 528 mic stations It is recommended that the description be kept to 16 characters or less 3 Click on the OK button to save and return to the Company Viewer The new Company will appear at the end of the list in the viewer Note The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to discard changes and return to the viewer form Edit Click the Edit button to bring up the editor form tor the company selected in the Company Viewer Alternatively double clicking on a company in the viewer will also open the editor Company Description ire Department 4 Previous p Next Figure 5 11 Company Editor Editing an existing company opens a window with two additional buttons Clicking on the Previous and Next buttons allows quick navigation to the previous and next records in the viewer Navigating to a new record via the Previous and Next buttons atter making changes to the data in the editor will result in a contirmation prompt as shown in Figure 5 12 The prompt options are as follows e Yes Save current changes before navigating away e No Do not save changes before navigating away 8l Will TED Chapter 5 Mic Station Security
240. on to open a drop down menu of available zone types to display This allows the user to only view zones ot the type selected in the Filter By menu A check next to the zone type indicates the current filter setting 124 Wim JED Innovative Electronic Designs J add f Edit Delete Fiter g Print zones Tinie Show All a000 zones D Card Zone Multi 405 Analog Audio Multi 405 Analog Data Multi A25 Digital Audio Zone Sign zone Titan Digital Audio Zone i D ard one D Card Zone J titan Titan Digital BigReg Titan 10 titan Titan Digital BigReg Titan 11 titan Titan Digital BigReg Titan 12 titan Titan Digital BigReg Titan 13 titan Titan Digital BigReg Titan 14 titan Titan Digital BigReg Titan OE 40 Record s 4 Figure 8 8 Zones Viewer Filter Filter the Zones list 1 Click the Zones icon trom the enterprise Navigator window to open the viewer Chapter 8 Zone Setup 2 Click the Filter button then move the cursor down to highlight the Filter By menu item 3 Select the zone type to be displayed Select Show All to show all types in the list Print This button interfaces with the IED Print Manager software to open the print preview window containing the zones data Reter to the IED Print Manager section for more information on this feature OK Click the OK button to close the viewer 125 Will TED Chapter 8 Zone Setup Innovative
241. oono patric iat St 236 Menu and Tool Bars e cece cece cece 236 RU OSI Seana ye we eee oe ol a a 237 Test Results Grid oc occ ed oe oo cee aS 2 238 Status Bal dee ox ae Sos t uc sh Be eeu Go cent 240 Point Selection Window _ 242 Auto Test Configuration Window 244 TtleBar ph Bence tot he Sorte ead as hese sate a ee act cae beaten cue 245 Menu Tool Bars oaaao aoaaa oaaao wot etel 8 245 Point Selection Grid 2 cle ec ec cc cece ce cee 246 Status DOW marca tad mete ee fond 1 29h Dee oe Sel hast 249 Edit Test Signals Window 251 ESB Ot ee 2s yo acs 2 fee eee HE ie eae ee DA 251 Edit Test Schedules Window 255 Title Bar 24 Akt Cac to eee Ra te et etd heated 255 Test Sequences 2 eee cece eee eee eee eee cee 256 Schedules for selected Sequences 257 Edit Test Points Window 259 Wet Gi cc cos ctw care sia Senden dered adhe nat Daan 259 Points list box Add Point button and Del Point DUT Oii etc e ote ect hee a es eas 259 GicuData L 3 213343 cad ached pe hs dred le 260 Collector Unit wie cus chakteoe Wacens cade Modine aan 260 Reset Points OK and Cancel Buttons 261 About Window ee eee eeee 262 System Supervision 263 Accessing System Supervision Features 264 COMNQUIEs sienna E 265 View FOUNS ciccicrcsccetetu ceavencauedoetesiaces 267 Device Monitoring
242. or on the desktop 2 Click the Open Template button on the toolbar This will display the Open Template window as shown in Figure 6 4 3 Highlight the template in the window and click the OK button to load it Double clicking on the template name in the list will also cause it to open 4 Click the Delete Template button located in the toolbar 5 Click Yes to contirm the delete action Clicking No will cancel the delete operation Ei re you sure you want bo delete the current template Delete Template Figure 6 5 Delete Template Confirmation Note This will delete the template from the database Mic stations that have this template loaded will not be changed until a new template is sent to those stations Importing and Exporting Templates Sometimes it is necessary to create a template for one system and transfer it to another In order to accomplish this the 528 Interface Designer provides functions to import trom a tile and export to a tile The tile is saved in an XML tile format with a xml tile extension Export a Template 1 Open a template as previously described 2 Click on the File menu and select Export Template To File as shown in Figure 6 6 92 Wim JED Ennevative Eleetronte Designs 0 Chapter 6 528 Interface Designer 528 528 Interface Designer File Edit Actions Help Logout Fz New Template Ctrl M Open Template Chrl o Import Template From File Ctrl I Export Template To Fil
243. ormation used for the Secondary Network Port This setting is usually set to 0 0 0 0 as the frame is not connected via a router e Set Click this button to send the data tor the Secondary Network Port to the frame 54 Wia JED innovative Eleetronte Designs 000 Chapter 3 Titan IPAU Contig Tool Zone Attn amp Backup Tab This tab is used to contigure three sets of parameters A T9160 amplitier trame has a dedicated slot for a backup amplifier card This tab configures the backup amplifier switching functions This is also where the zone numbers are assigned to each output channel These are critical and must match the zone settings in the Channel Settings of Enterprise This tab also provides quick access to the output attenuator for each channel and provides a quick method for setting all channels to the same level Fi Titan IPAU Config Tool loj x Application Actions Help mi amp sy IP Address 10 20 10 11 Set Date M Perm Reset Flt Sft Reset Fctry DIt 7 Reload Data after Set Reset D General Network Zone Atten amp Backup Mute amp Bypass E Bam Bk Amp Enable 7 m Zones Chan Attenuation 7 A B Reload Data Card 1 JV Enabled ji 2 16 20 Send Data Card2 JV Enabled f 4 Card3 V Enabled B fo Card V Enabled P fs CardS fv Enabled fp fo Cad Enabled i fiz Card7 X Enabled fs fe Carde J Enabled fs fe Disble All 8 6 Set Al T m a o
244. own in Figure 12 13 This window will appear when a new event is created or an existing event is selected tor editing 193 il TED Chapter 12 Time Talker Innovative Electronic Designs IED Time Talker Define Events Ioj x Relative Event Time Language a Minutes oo f Engish French German f Spanish Play on Frame s 1 Training Hoorn Titan ACS o one Map Selecte O 2 Training Room Legacy ACS 10 2 131 111 No Zone Map Selected Change one Map 10 AllCal Mok Cancel 300 Concourse A 20 Terminal B Figure 12 13 Detine Events Window Event configuration options are as follows Relative Event Time Use the up down arrow buttons to set the minute after the hour when the message will play Language Select the language to use for the time announcement Play on Frame s Check the box tor each announcement controller that should play the event Change Zone Map This droplist box will display the zone maps available on the frame highlighted in the Play on Frame s list Click to open the droplist box and select the zone map to use for that trame OK Click this button to save the changes and close the window Cancel Click this button to discard any changes and close the window Note While the application is still open an event will not begin playing on the set times until the Apply button is pressed 194 Password Management The Enterprise Software Suite otters a great de
245. p Mic Station Viewer Double click the Mics icon to bring up the Viewer as shown in Figure 4 3 This window provides a list of all mic stations currently programmed in the selected announcement controller This window provides access to edit or delete existing mic stations as well as add new ones add edit gt Delete gt Print All Mic Stations in Group Location Mic Type Device ID ea ke Training Room Equipment Rack 526 mic station 10 Gate C4 Jetway 520 mic station 554 j 11 Gate C4 Ticket Counter 526 mic station 556 j 12 Gate C5 Ticket Counter 526 mic station 50 j 13 Gate CS Jetway 526 mic station 5o1 LJ 14 Sim 526 mic station 566 J 16 520 Desktop Handheld 520 Mic Station Themis 631 J 20 Microphone Station Sim 526 mic station 56 GK 6 Record s 4 Figure 4 3 Mic Station Viewer Double click any mic station in the viewer to open the Mic Station Editor window for that station iewer J add Edt All Mic Stations in Group gt e Delete gt Print Location Mic Type Device ID RACKMOUNT B26 mic station lt Mic Location gt B20 Mic Station 629 IK 2 Recordis 2 Figure 4 4 Mic Station Viewer Toolbar The toolbar located at the top of the Mic Station Viewer window and provides quick access to the commands needed to add edit or delete mic stations 63 Will TED Chapter 4 Microphone Station Setup itn nvative ete cron pestane Add 64 Cl
246. plifier Card 4 Fault 228 Amplifier Card 5 Fault 229 Amplifier Card 6 Fault 230 Amplifier Card 7 Fault 231 Amplifier Card 8 Fault 232 Amplifier Card 9 Fault 239 Faulted Amplifier Not Backed Up 241 Communication Fault AIO Unit 1 242 Communication Fault AlO Unit 2 243 Communication Fault MTC Unit 1 244 Communication Fault MTC Unit 2 245 Communication Fault LVIO Unit 1 246 Communication Fault LVIO Unit 2 T90xxDSP NDU 241 Communication Fault AIO Unit 1 242 Communication Fault AIO Unit 2 243 Communication Fault AIO Unit 3 244 Communication Fault AIO Unit 4 245 Communication Fault MTC Unit 1 Subsystem Card Component Failure 274 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 16 System Supervision Fault Number Values Titan T9160 IPAU 1 Amplitier Card 1 Over Temperature 2 Amplifier Card 2 Over Temperature 3 Amplifier Card 3 Over Temperature 4 Amplifier Card 4 Over Temperature 5 Amplifier Card 5 Over Temperature 6 Amplifier Card 6 Over Temperature 7 Amplifier Card 7 Over Temperature 8 Amplitier Card 8 Over Temperature 9 Amplitier Card 9 Over Temperature 17 Channel 1A Ground Fault 18 Channel 1B Ground Fault 19 Channel 2A Ground Fault 20 Channel 2B Ground Fault 21 Channel 3A Ground Fault 22 Channel 3B Ground Fault 23 Channel 4A Ground Fault 24 Channel 4B Ground Fault 25 Channel 5A Ground
247. point the application toatrame The application will open with the IP address last used The detault address trom the factory is 10 2 150 173 or 10 2 133 14 If the utility prompts to reload data click on the Yes button 4 Titan IPAU Config Tool Joj x Application Actions Help te i Sa IP Address 10 20 10 11 Set Date M Perm Reset Fit SFr Reset Fetry DFE Reload Data after Set Reset O General Network Fone Atten amp Backup Mute amp Bypass BGM Figure 3 1 IPAU Contig Tool Detail Menus Application This menu has the following options Set General Tab Select this option to send all data on the General Tab to the trame at the address in the IP Address entry box This is equivalent to the Send Data button located on the General tab The F4 key can be used as a shortcut to pertorm this function Get General Tab Select this option to retrieve the information on the General Tab from the trame at the address in the IP Address entry box This is equivalent to the Get Data button on General tab The F5 key can be used as a shortcut to perform this function Close Select this option to exit the IPAU Contig Tool application 48 iin JED innovative Eleetronte Designs 0000000 Chapter 3 Titan IPAU Contig Tool Actions This menu provides access to the same functions available trom the toolbar buttons Each function is described in the next section Help Select About to bring up a di
248. r Alternatively double clicking on a message in the viewer will also open the editor S 4 Previous b Next Play OK Cancel Figure 9 5 Next Previous Buttons Editing an existing message opens the editor window with two additional buttons as shown in Figure 9 5 Clicking on the Previous and Next buttons allows quick navigation to the previous and next records in the viewer Navigating to a new record via the Next and Previous buttons atter making changes to the data in the editor will result in a contirmation prompt as shown in Figure 9 6 The prompt options are as follows e Yes Save current changes before navigating away e No Do not save changes before navigating away e Yes to All Save current and all subsequent changes while navigating using the Previous and Next buttons without any additional prompts x Data has changed Do you want to save current data before moving to another one i ho Yes to all Figure 9 6 Edit Contirmation Dialog Box Edit a PDRP Message The steps necessary to edit an existing PDRP message are as follows Note Reterto PDRP Editor on page 136 for details on the PDRP Editor window 134 Wia JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter Q PDRP Messages 1 Double click on the PDRP Messages icon from the Enterprise Navigator window to open the Viewer Highlight a PDRP Message in the Viewer Click the Edit button to open the PDRP Editor Make the necessary changes to
249. r Screen Button Width This is the width in pixels of all buttons on the mic station screen The default value is 110 pixels Button Default Background Color This is the background color used for all buttons that have the Use Default Colors checkbox checked next to the individual button color settings This is useful as it provides an easy way to control the color of many buttons in the template Button Default Text Color This is the text color used for all buttons that have the Use Default Colors checkbox checked next to the individual button color settings This is useful as it provides an easy way to control the color of the text in the template 98 Wim JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 6 528 Interface Designer Button Properties When a button is selected on the treeview its properties are edited using the controls displayed on the right side of the application window as shown in Figure 6 14 528 528 Interface Designer SIE x File Edit Actions Help a B BR R 4 L Ne el Delete Send To Show Preview Add Delete Move Move Add Delete Template Template Template Template Mics Window Button Button Button Up Button Down Scroll Box Scroll Bo Template Name IMPORTED IED Training Room Enable Keypad El Button Bar Button Enter Claim Number Enter Gate Number Button Action C Show aScrollBox Select Flight Message IV Fixed Next Departure a Arrival Message Key an Entry Code 1000 Pause Sequence Log O
250. r assigned to a mic station button or pop up menu that will access this zone map This value must be in the defined range for the selected Zone Group Type droplist box below When the mouse cursor is held above the Entry Code edit box it displays the valid range of numbers in a pop up balloon help box as seen in Zone Group Editor General Tab on page 116 Zone Group Type droplist box The type of zone group announcement associated with this entry These are detined elsewhere in Enterprise by the system administrator The detault zone group types as shipped trom the factory are Terminal Local and Emergency These default types are described below See h1 SectionTitle on page 116 Terminal 10 through 99 iin JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter Zone Group Setup Typically used for a large area in an airport such as a concourse or all of ticketing These announcements are recorded and played back as the zones become available This type of announcement is a lower priority and is typically used tor courtesy announcements or general intormation Terminal zone groups are global and use zones in all announcement controllers Local 3 digit code based on ACS number Typically used for a gate holding area in an airport This type of announcement is recorded and played back as the zones become available unless moditied in the Announcement Definitions setup Local announcements will override terminal announcements that are play
251. r the tilename and select the tile type WAV or DAX The user can choose to keep the existing filename and type or enter different ones Save to ACS This option allows the active tile to be saved directly to the ACS Selecting this option will display the window shown in Figure 1 13 Select the appropriate take language enter the take filename and click on the Save button to download the audio take file to the ACS The status bar located at the bottom of the main window will indicate success or failure of this operation Click the Cancel button to close the window without transferring the file Care must be taken to not override a take file in the ACS unless intended The user is not notitied if a tile with the same name currently exists on the ACS However clicking on the View DAX File List button produces a window that lists the files that are currently stored on the ACS Note Note that this option is only available to logged in users with sutticient permission Save File To ACS EJ Language Filename Jo English take9402 dax View D File List Cancel Figure 11 13 Save File to ACS Window Save Selected to ACS This option allows a selected region of the take tile to be saved to the ACS The selected region of the take appears in brighter color with a blue background whereas unselected regions have a black background A region is selected by setting the start point with the lett mouse button and then set
252. r x General Zone Type Specific Additional Properties Owned By acs S10cPU Type Location id card J Enable this zone fone Number s 1 4 Previous b Next OK Cancel Figure 8 5 Next Previous Buttons Editing an existing zone opens the editor window with two additional buttons as shown in Figure 8 5 From this window the option of entering multiple zones in the Zone Number s is not available However the zone number can be changed trom this window Clicking on the Previous and Next buttons allows quick navigation to the previous and next records in the viewer Navigating to a new record via the Next and Previous buttons after making changes to the data in the editor will result in a confirmation prompt as shown in Figure 8 6 The prompt options are as follows e Yes Save current changes before navigating away e No Do not save changes before navigating away e Yes to All Save current and all subsequent changes while navigating using the Previous and Next buttons without any additional prompts X Data has changed Do you want to save current data before moving to another one Mo Yes to all Figure 8 6 Edit Confirmation Dialog Box Edit a Zone The steps necessary to edit an existing zone are as follows Note Referto Zone Editor on page 126 for details on the Zone Editor window 123 Will TED Chapter 8 Zone Setup Innovative Electronic Designs
253. rent titan 3B Amp Output titan 3B Speaker Current titan 44 Amp Output titan 44 Speaker Current titan W tO ho ho co J CO w OO IOAOAAL DEDERE cn cn 0D wy J nA J pa Uy v m S e ga ie e e e a a a m aa a aA j j j j i j w UUU Figure 15 4 Point Selection Window The top dark blue fading to gray portion of the Point Selection window specifies the description of the test to be run brief instructions to select a point and possibly a frequency the type of test to be run Single Point Test or Test Tone and a reminder that the only points available are points already configured as part of the test For tests with multiple frequencies a list of checkboxes one for each available frequency is shown near the top of the window immediately below the reminder Only one frequency may be selected at a time The main portion of the window in white displays a list of checkboxes one for each available test point Only one point may be selected at a time The other controls on this window are as follows Clear button Clears any point selection resetting the form to defaults OK button This button is only available after one point and one frequency if displayed has been selected Clicking the OK button initiates the test shown at the top of the window for the point and frequency if shown selected and then closes the
254. roller and are added to the announcement controller in Enterprise Figure 4 1 shows the Navigator window with a 510CPU selected in the Tree View The Mics icon is located in the Tasks and Detail section of the main Navigator window E 2 Fee hpi Eo Too raih A Lego J af x amp mote KE P Mic Station Viewer Icon T pepeo F T pen m e a a Taree Arep See piren miir Torch kE Ba rRe tr A G2 T amp j manisa 7 Lawes Taim PA h mk Eire _ Pci 203 Q a nd ait A me ing PA here s i Figure 4 1 Navigator Window If the Mic Stations icon in the Tree View is selected then the Tasks and Details section changes to a list of mic stations as shown in Figure 4 2 Double click on any mic station to bring up the Mic Station Editor window for that station Mic Number Location Mic Station Type Device ID j J Training Room Equipment Rack 520 mic station Doo 10 Gate C4 Jetway 520 mic station 594 J 11 Gate C4 Ticket Counter B20 mic station 556 E le Gate C5 Ticket Counter 526 mic station 550 13 Gate CS Jetway 520 mic station 581 i 14 Sim S20 mic station bas Jig S20 Desktop Handheld S20 Mic Station Themis 631 20 Microphone Station Sim 526 mic station 567 Figure 4 2 Tasks and Details for Mic Stations For detailed step by step instructions on adding microphone stations refer to Tutorial B Adding and Configuring Mic Stations 62 Will TED innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 4 Microphone Station Setu
255. rols in this group box are discussed in detail in the tollowing paragraphs The Schedules list box on the left of the Schedules tor selected Sequences group box allows tor the selection of an existing schedule for the test selected in the Test Sequences list box so that the schedule may be edited The Add button in the Schedules for selected Sequence group box group box adds a new schedule with detault settings The Delete button in the Schedules tor selected Sequence group box deletes the currently selected Schedule Note Each test must have at least one schedule defined Therefore if only one schedule is listed the Delete button is disabled The remaining items in this group box define the parameters of the schedule when the test will be run These items are not specitically labeled but rather are organized with labels so that reading the list gives a clear human understandable description of the schedule For example for the values shown in Figure 15 10 the test will be run between 12 00 am and 12 00 am 24 hours on Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday and Sunday every sixty seconds For clarity this document will refer to the top two spin edits as the time edits the edit next to the label on as the day edit and the bottom spin edit as the interval edit Each of the schedule parameters are discussing in the following list Enable Schedule This checkbox determines whether the selec
256. rom the station must be routed to an output zone that has been properly configured as an ACS Output device type and wired to a 596 Monitor Test mainframe Any zone in the system can be used for this purpose but that zone will always have the test tones from the mic station during a set or test It is recommended that the last zone in the system be designated as the Mic Test Zone and not used as a system output zone The currently selected zone will appear highlighted in green Click on a zone number to change the zone Monitor Testing ed Cancel Apply a Figure 14 12 Monitor Test Mic Test Zone Tab Set Tab Click the Start button on this tab to pertorm a system wide set This will cause audible tones to be played through the system and the levels at each point will be recorded as the set values tor each point 229 Will TED Chapter 14 596 Series Test Configuration tnnevative tleetromte pestare Caution Executing a system wide set will block all non emergency operations trom being pertormed on the system 900 series emergency messages or live announcements will override the set operation CI Monitor Testing X General Audible Zones Mic TestZone Sek Test System wide Set Start Status Figure 14 13 Monitor Test Set Test Tab The controls on this tab are used to manually execute the various system wide tests and configure the automatic testing options To test a single circu
257. roup are as follows Highlight a user group in the User Group Viewer window Click the Edit button located on the toolbar Make necessary changes to the data on the form m se ee Click on the OK button to save and return to the User Group Viewer Note The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to discard changes and return to the viewer form 78 iin JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 5 Mic Station Security Delete Click the Delete button to remove the currently selected user group trom the system The user is prompted for confirmation Figure 5 7 before the selected record is erased In addition to erasing one record at a time multiple records can be selected at once Simply select multiple user groups by holding down the CTRL key and clicking on multiple records in the viewer and click on the Delete button from the toolbar x amp Are you sure you want to delete selected record s i Mo Cancel h Figure 5 7 Delete Confirmation Dialog Box Delete a User Group The steps necessary to delete an existing User Group are as follows 1 Highlight a user group in the User Group Viewer window or select multiple user groups by holding down the CTRL key while clicking 2 Click the Delete button located on the toolbar 3 Click the Yes button to delete the selected group s The Cancel or No button can be clicked at any time to cancel the delete operation and return to the viewer form
258. s command will change the window to display the Parametric Equalizer EQ controls Delay This command will change the window to display the Delay settings Ambient Analysis This command will change the window to display the Ambient Analysis contiguration options Monitor Menu Figure 2 26 shows a close up view of the signal flow map located at the top of the Channel Settings window The full signal flow can be seen in Figure 2 3 as the input router and zone manager are not shown in this image The M icon represents a virtual monitor point that is available in the digital signal flow Each point can be monitored by lett clicking on the icon or by selecting the point in the Monitor Menu When selected the audio can be both monitored visually and aurally through a local powered speaker properly connected to the appropriate hardware Figure 2 26 Titan Frame Signal Flow The Monitor Menu provides the same access to the various virtual monitor points as clicking on the icon in the signal tlow 37 Will TED Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Innovative Electronic Designs AQ Monitag Help y ols EO Output Ambient Qutpuk Amplifier Input t Input Amplifier Dut Show Meter wf Auto Show Meter Figure 2 27 Monitor Menu Direct Input This switches to the monitor point to allow monitoring of the direct input of the selected channel This is the analog audio input located on the back of the T9160 mainframe EQ O
259. s shown in Figure 5 3 Enter a descriptive name for the user group here Se F User Groups Description Show Advanced Options gt gt Figure 5 3 User Group Editor New User Group Add New User Group The steps necessary to add a new User Group are as follows 1 Click the Add button in the User Group Viewer 2 Enter a meaningful description or name of the new user group 3 Click on the OK button to save and return to the User Group Viewer The new user group will appear at the end of the list in the viewer The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to discard changes and return to the viewer form Show Advanced Options This button provides access to contigure the microphone station graphic permissions This feature is provided tor legacy support only and should not be used unless directed by IED Technical Support The 528 Intertace Designer should be used to control the graphic permissions for the mic stations User Groups Description Detta Air Lines Graphic Permissions These permissions are used to control the behavior of the 528 mic station buttons and scrollboxes Each user group must have one or more bits checked Mic station users belonging to a user group will automatically receive the graphic bits defined for that user group IF a mic station user belongs to more than one user group then the graphic permissions For those user groups will be ORed and assigned to that mic station user
260. same function User Accounts Select User Click this droplist box to open a list of all users in the system as shown in Figure 13 14 Scroll through this box and select a user to view or edit Edit User Accounts File Edit CLICK FOR DROP DOWN LIST Select User SELECT NAME maole nombutsiri DRAG UP DOWN TO SCROLL Figure 13 14 User Selection Selected User Information This section will display the username along with the first and last names of the selected user This is the user that will be edited when either the Edit User Intormation or Edit Permissions buttons or menu functions are selected This is also the user that will be deleted when the Delete button is pressed Edit User Accounts x File Edit O7 Select User nvecheler Selected User Information User Name rvechsler First Mame fF or Last Name fwi echealer Edit User Information Edit Permissions Figure 13 15 User Name Selected 205 Will TED Chapter 13 Password Management Innovative Electronic Designs Create New User To create a new user account select either the New icon or the New menu item from the Edit menu ANew User form will appear as shown in Figure 13 16 Enter the appropriate information as described in the next section and click the OK button to save the new user Login Information Mame Password Confirm Password User Information First Name Last Hame Lan
261. scroll box from the template 97 Will TED Chapter 6 528 Interface Designer Innovative Electronic Designs Buttons The Button Bar Each 528 mic station has a line of buttons on the right of the display referred to as the button bar The 528 Interface Designer is the tool used to program these buttons When adding the first button it will appear under the Button Bar in the tree view on the lett side of the screen Clicking on the Button Bar in the tree view will show settings that apply to all buttons in the template as shown below in Figure 6 13 aoix File Edit Actions Help 5 ud e New Open Save Delete SendTo Show Preview Add Delete Move love Delete Template Template Template Template Mics Window Button Button Button Up Button Down ScrollBox Scroll Box Template Name IMPORTED IED Training Room Enable Keypad T Button Bar Enter Claim Number Enter Gate Number Button Width Next Departure Arrival Message Button Default BackgroundColor C Pause Sequence Repeat Last Departure I Button Default Text Color Select Seq Step Add FAS Language Change Sequence Flight Delayed Flight Cancelled Flight Gate Change Flight Messages Local Gate Areas General Messages Security Breach Mute System UnMute System Log Out All Terminals Scroll Boxes Select Flight Message Select Message Select Delay Message Select Cancel Message Security Breach Messages Terminals Figure 6 13 Button Ba
262. se pointer over the tab Figure 1 2 Application Bar Enterprise is launched by clicking on the icon shown in Figure 1 2 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter l Overview Enterprise Navigator Window The Enterprise Navigator Window is the main application window It allows the user to navigate to the various control forms that allow configuration of the hardware and software components of the complete system The Enterprise Navigator Windows has tive 5 different sections as shown below o IED Enterprise bled L gt togn ee ee Toolbar ACS Specific Tasks t Tasks and Details 10 a 2 Training Room ACS Titan System A Training Room Titan ACS Ww 590 Server Pt 2y Training Room ACS Legacy System Training Room Legacy ACS Gateway Computer MMM 540 Ambient Analysis System wide Tasks amp TREO Gaa sa Languages Takes FAS Variables Zone Groups Entry Code PDRP System Definitions Messages Settings N gt aa B amp k amp O B a ti Mic Station Send Data Priorities Announcem User Groups FAS Templates Companies Users Definitions General 0 Device ID 550 Device Type 504 ACS 510CPU Status Bar Not Logged In 7 Figure 1 3 Enterprise Navigator Window Menu Bar Provides access to various system functions and shortcuts to other related application modules Toolbar Provides quick access to commonly used system functions
263. se the application Users can login or logout of the system at any time by selecting this option trom the File menu or by pressing the F2 key Figure 1 1 7 shows the login window Enter the proper user name and password to gain access to the application Security Server TO i B D ai Innovative Electronic Designs Figure 11 7 Login Window The status bar is located across the bottom of the main application window It displays the user that is currently logged into the system as shown in Figure 1 8 The status bar displays Not Logged In when no user is logged into the system 166 iin JED uoaraeiveenieesiamieimentgeg 0G E A TDRP EctitOr User zaid Ahmed Tol Figure 11 8 Status Bar User When logged in the menu item changes to Logout and may be selected to log out of the system Pressing the F2 key will immediately log out New File This option creates a new blank audio take with a length of one second New tiles are given a detault filename of untitled1 untitled2 etc Files must be named when they are saved Multiple take tiles can be created or opened simultaneously and each will appear as a separate tab located immediately below the toolbar as shown in Figure 11 9 Switching between open files is accomplished by either clicking the appropriate tab or selecting the filename trom the View menu gt gt ws ee J Weim Select From E ta To j1e000 t volume o E yntitledi
264. ser group Groups Companies amp Gates Tab This tab assigns ownership of a mic station to a specitic company and also assigns it to one or more gates When active only the annoucements available to the designated company will be available at the station E Mic Station Editor X General Permissions amp User Settings Groups Companies amp Gates Key amp Button Assignements Sidekick F4 Assigned Gates gt e gt gt lt lt El El 4 Previous p Next Figure 4 7 Groups Companies amp Gates Tab Groups Companies Droplist Box This assigns a group or company to the mic station when the lock features is not used When the lock feature is enabled then the user s login account determines this property Note For systems with the Flight Announcement System FAS installed the group is normally an airline The mic station will only have access to that airline s arrival or departure announcements when the station is not locked When it is locked the group company associated with the mic station user determines announcement availability Available Gates and Assigned Gates These lists are used to associate the mic station with a specitic gate or gates The gt and lt buttons are used to move selected gates between the available and assigned lists The gt gt and lt lt buttons move all items trom one list to the other in the appropriate direction 68 Wia JED
265. sl eae Logout Launch j P Shortcuts Ctrl 4 Links Ctrl Refresh Tig IED Win32 Services Configuration Utility Chrl 5 Application Management F 455 0r d Change Password System Information l Configure Server il TED Event Log viewer Edit Accounts Tab Properties 7 Help Contents Fl About Exit Figure 13 1 IED Application Bar Alternatively the Password Manager configuration utility can be launched from the Tools menu on the Enterprise Navigator window as shown in Figure 13 2 Tools Help OG IED DRP Editor g IED Enterprise Dashboard 28 IED Print Manager Wah PasswordManagerConfig exe Figure 13 2 Enterprise Tools Menu The Password Manager contig utility is a launcher application containing a main menu of buttons used to launch the various configuration windows for the password server Figure 13 3 shows the main menu ot the Password manager contig utility Note TheApp Mgmt button is typically grayed out and is reserved for use by factory service personnel 196 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 13 Password Management Password Manager Config sy App Mgmt Config Verity Edit Accs Ching Pu Current User Jadoeden Figure 13 3 Password Manager Main Menu 197 Will TED Chapter 13 Password Management Innovative Electronic Designs Login Logoff 198 If a user is currently logged into the system
266. ssword fields Clicking on the OK button or pressing the ENTER key will process the login It the login was successtul the Login window will disappear and the user s name will be displayed in the Status Bar iin JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter l Overview Logged In Jason Kleiman 2 Figure 1 7 Status Bar User Information It the login information entered was incorrect the user will be shown the following window Figure 1 8 Incorrect Password Click the OK button to remove this window Logout To log out of the application the user can select Logout trom the Application menu click the Logout button on the toolbar or press the F2 key E TED Enterprise Application Edit Tools Help Figure 1 9 Logout Button lee Edit Tools Logdut F2 a Reload Data F5 fey Close Figure 1 10 Logout Menu Will TED Chapter l Overview Innovative Electronic Designs Menu Bar Application Menu h Edit Tools Logdut F2 er Reload Data F5 ay Close Figure 1 11 Application Menu Login Logout The text on this button will change to reflect the available command If the user is currently logged into the system this button will become a Logout button If currently logged out it will change to a Login button Selecting this button is the same as selecting Login Logout from the Application menu Selecting Login will prompt the user to enter their user name and password Reload Data This option w
267. station users on the system as detined in Enterprise When changing the value of this list box the template will only show buttons and scroll box items for the user selected This is a good way to display what a template will look like for a particular user without sending the template to the mic station Lx Template Preview IED Training Room Figure 6 12 Preview Window 96 min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 6 528 Interface Designer Add Button Click this button to add a new button to the template A new button is always added to the bottom of the treeview Once added the position is changed using the Move Button Up Move Button Down buttons Enter a name for the button in the caption field Delete Button Click this button to delete the button currently selected in the treeview This action is immediate and does not result in any further prompting Move Button Up Click this button to move the currently selected button up one level in the tree view Click as many times as needed to place the button in the desired place Move Button Down Click this button to move the currently selected button down one level in the tree view Click as many times as needed to place the button in the desired place Add Scroll Box Click this button to add a new scroll box to the template Enter a name for the scroll box in the title field Delete Scroll Box Click this button to delete the currently selected
268. stem supervision This includes the 590RU Gateway computer with installed 590A audio supervision card and 5901 communications card Gateway Monitor Test SEU Diesen nieces k cies aud en aese cen told 214 C nligure Montor PONS 2cc2322usuanceriadecsumasareuntecasern sesaunces 215 MS Se UE Sad gent ks dort a fan lahat Seed le tay es eh NS a ae 218 ACS Output Test Results Tab 2 22 ee eee eee eee cece eee cess 218 External Test Results o llalL LLL LLL Meee st WA ede tbat te 219 Mic Test Results a o c rt asecis ced ccc aoaaa eed eaten atte aooaa noaoo nannan 220 Monitor ZONE ollha LLL LLL LLL LLL L LLL LLL LLL L LLL LLL LLa a222 222 Montor Mi eerde et ste a a oad a a a aaa athe ealla 224 Gateway Confguraion ssssen easan a a bias hace a 226 M mtorltes ana a Maes Bea Pa he oO a a r a a a a AE 227 SONORA Tab a oe hind eects ee a buts doesta dimond ah masse inc hacen 227 Audible Zones Tab _ 0 ccc cece eee cece cece eee cece 228 Mic Test Zone Tob ioe esis ae Sasso aot oaaao Dea dew een tne auton 229 SIE a apie nee ean CRORE OY a eT COND Lor en ENNEN TEE E 229 PS OID hehe eta hea Aaa a tes eae he ete mal dg Dalen lade aaa 230 213 Will TED Chapter 14 596 Series Test Configuration tnnevative tleetromte pestare Gateway Monitor Test Setup The Gateway Computer device must be added and configured to each ACS where one is used s Gateway Computer Figure 14 1 Gateway Icon To contigure the monitor points and operations tor the Gat
269. t Innovative Electronic Designs 208 Edit Permissions Permissions grant individual users the authority to edit change set up or control the use of certain features sub teatures or portions of the Enterprise program and associated applications Their purpose is to allow maximum program flexibility yet provide a means to limit it to those most qualified Application Area User Name abede Available Permissions Current Permissions FAS Templates Languages FAS Varables Entry Code Definitions Mic Station Users System Settings Mics os Announcement Definitions PORP Messages User Groups Priorities ones Send Data Takes one Groups Figure 13 18 User Permissions To edit permissions select a user trom the Select User droplist box and then either click the Edit Permissions button or select Permissions trom the Edit menu The User Permissions screen will appear as shown in Figure 13 18 Application Area This droplist box selects the specitic application group of permissions that will be available tor editing Refer to Table 13 1 for a list of the available application areas and what permissions are available tor each area Available Permissions This lists the permissions that can be granted for the selected application area Current Permissions This lists the permissions currently granted to the current user This button is used to add the highlighted permission in the Available Permissions window to th
270. t User Accounts window as shown in Figure 13 13 The screen has two menus located just below the title bar and two function icons available on the toolbar Edit User Accounts Z File Edit Select User Selected User Information User Name Jaaaaa First Name ib bbb Last Hame Jaaaaa Edit User Information Edit Perrnissions Figure 13 13 Edit User Accounts Window Menus File Menu This menu has one available function Select Close to exit the Edit User Accounts screen and return to the main menu Edit Menu This menu leads to all the tunctions used to create or modity user accounts New Select this function to create a new user This will open the New User window as shown in Figure 13 16 A shortcut to this function is provided on the toolbar by clicking on the lett of the two icons Delete Select this function to delete the selected user trom the system A shortcut to this function is available by clicking the right icon with the X on the toolbar User Information Select this function to open the Edit User window Figure 13 1 7 for the selected user Clicking the Edit User Information button will perform the same function 204 min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 13 Password Management Permissions Select this function to open the User Permissions window Figure 13 18 to modify the permissions for the selected user Clicking the Edit Permissions button will perform the
271. t Value 23dB Deviation 3dB It the test result of the point is 25 9 or higher then the point will pass the test It the test result of the point is 26dB or lower then a fault will be declared Audio Listening Level This sets the level of the output physically located on the 590A card that is used to drive a powered monitor speaker This level only attects the audible monitor level during a test and will not impact the test results This level can be adjusted by either typing in a value or clicking the up or down arrow buttons Mic Station to use for Bus Test The 500R card located in the 500ACS mainframe has eight 8 audio busses In order to test these busses the system uses the oscillator in a mic station to test each bus This mic station is typically the rack mount mic station located in the equipment room Enter the appropriate mic station number in the box to designate that station for the bus test Audible Zones Tab This tab determines the zones that will be activated during an audible test Zones that are highlighted in green will have a test tone played to them when a test or set is executed Click on a zone number to add or remove it from the audible test group Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 14 596 Series Test Configuration lx Monitor Testing Status Figure 14 11 Monitor Test Audible Zones Tab Mic Test Zone Tab In order to test a microphone station the test signal f
272. t of File Shift Ctrl Home Move Both Cursors to the End of File Shift Ctrl End H Insert Silence Selected Range Figure 11 17 Edit Menu Undo Select this option to reverse the last action made by the user Cut This option removes the selected audio region and stores it on the clipboard so it can be inserted later using the Paste command 171 Will TED Chapter II DRP Editor tative etcetera Destane 172 Copy This option places a copy of the selected region onto the clipboard so it can be inserted later using the Paste command Paste This option is only available if a selected region has been placed on the clipboard using either the Cut or Copy commands The region trom the clipboard will be inserted at the location of the left selection cursor Audio data starting at the lett selection cursor is shifted to the right of the pasted region Trim This option discards the audio data to the left and to the right of the selected region The unselected region is discarded leaving only the selected region to occupy the entire workspace The trim operation is useful for removing leading and trailing silences or unwanted audio Select All This option moves the lett and right selection cursors to the start and end of the audio data respectively This provides a quick means to select an entire take tor editing Move Left Cursor to Start of File This option moves the lett selection cursor to the start of the audio
273. t screen gt If there are multiple screens there will Together uniquely identity a screen be multiple tags Zoneid maps to the zone in the Announcement Controller or external zone Signid is usetul tor differentiating physical DDC devices 285 Will TED Chapter 17 VisDIDSetup O Oea Definition id Unique identifier for messages on this DDC format Defines what type of content this message contains Possible values are HTML and File File extensions supported if File format is selected Mpg mpeg Wmv Avi Mov Mp4 Jog joeg Git Bmp png Swt count The number of times this Defines a specific message for VisDID message is to play before moving Continuous Each message is a on to the next content screen that will be displayed priority Not currently used lt message gt for a certain amount of time before EE E P A E mime his moving to the next If there are particular message will stay on the multiple messages there will be screen in VisDID Continuous multiple instances of this node Weaeured ino Oineorasecond refreshrate The amount of time VisDID Continuous should wait in between refreshes of this message Any differences in the new HTML document are seamlessly merged so no flicker is noticed Measured in seconds restart Not currently used URL to content resource whether it be an HTML page or media file Wil TED Innovative Electronic Designs Innovative Electroni
274. t section displays the user that is currently logged into the system If no user is logged in it will display Not Logged In in place of the username Device ID 550 Device Type 504 AC5 510CPU Not Logged In AA Figure 1 26 Status Bar Overview This page has been intentionally left blank Titan Channel Configuration The following sections provide detail on the configuration of each different object available in the signal path of each channel Titan Channel Settings mpu ONG Zone Manager cick ss ttn Ae eth eh ate I etre ate Ambient Analysis PSO Sensors eos i hte ae ee eee eee ae Calibration File Menu sete Soest 5b Bate spats oo lotta ka bi os Dahil olor canara rode esos aE LENA a I 2 8 ct Nol one wae tee oo ia uaa ie a thts ae Montor Meni cssc ee ee eRe ee er ee A a giles OW Ate 010 e ane ene Ngee a a PEROT a gm RAR ome eeRNS re er EC ONGOING evesen rp ennaa EEE tue tes she beau cen arts Will TED Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Innovative Electronic Designs Titan Channel Settings Titan outputs are contigured by accessing the Titan Channel Settings window This can be accessed in one of two ways First the Titan trame must be selected in the Tree View Then double clicking on the Channel Settings icon will open the window without an individual channel selected Double clicking on a specitic channel will result in the window being opened with that channel already selected Train
275. ted by IED all copies of the Software in Your possession whether moditied or unmodified Upon termination all accrued fees shall he immediately due and payable Law Scope of Agreement This License shall be governed by the laws of the Commonwealth of Kentucky as it applies to contract made and performed in such state without giving effect to conflict of law rules You consent to jurisdiction and venue in the Commonwealth of Kentucky the courts in Jefferson County Kentucky and the U S District Court for the Western District of Kentucky in any proceeding arising out of or relating to this License or Your use of the Software If any term of this License is declared void or unenforceable by any court such declaration shall have no effect on the remaining terms hereof No modification of this License shall be binding on IED unless expressly accepted in writing by IED This License is the entire agreement concerning the Software between You and IED and it supersedes any prior representation or understanding End User License Agreement This page has been intentionally left blank Overview The following sections provide an introduction to the Enterprise Sottware Suite and the application user interface More details on specific system operation can be found in other sections of this manual FGUNCMING Emeron e 28 uidswee duns east anche tated Atlin aerate 2 Enterprise Navigator Window itech oth rer iio eae ot teas 3 EGOV Ere 6 6 16 comet m
276. ted in brighter green color with the ends marked by white vertical lines Left Mouse Button Click the lett mouse button to set the selection start point at the cursor position Right Mouse Button Click the right mouse button to set the selection end point at the cursor position The DRP Editor allows the user to open and work with multiple tiles at the same time DRP Editor Jof x File Edit View Tools Help j Oe Ae local amp Record e Celts je SBIR db EEE Select From i6962 z To 21424 A volume fo A K e z 3 Ref Level f 4 90 vj d x C Development DRP Editor take9401 dax Detail View User Zaid Ahmed Total 1 745 L 1 06s R 1 34s Retrieved file From ACS Figure 11 5 DRP Editor 165 Innovative Electronic Designs il TED Chapter 1 1 DRP Editor Menus The menu bar at the top provides access to tunctions of the DRP Editor The available menu functions are described below File Menu The File menu provides options to open save and other tile specitic activities as shown in Figure 11 6 File Edit wiew Tools Help ae Logout Fz _ New File Ctrl M H Open File F3 Open File From ACS E Save Chri 5 Save 4s Save to ACS Save Selected to ACS Close Chrl F4 Clase All File Properties BJ exit Figure 11 6 File Menu Login Logout Access to the DRP Editor is governed by the IED Security Server and users must be logged in to u
277. ted test will be run automatically according to the remainder of the selected schedule s parameters If checked the selected test will be run according to the schedule If unchecked the test will not be run according to the schedule but the selected test will still be run it other schedules are detined and enabled for this test When the Enable Schedule checkbox is unchecked the remaining items in this group cannot be edited Once Per Day When checked this check box contigures the schedule to only run the test once per day at the time specitied in the top time edit on the days shown in the days edit Since these values are not used in this case the other time edit and the interval edit are disabled when this checkbox is checked If unchecked the schedule is contigured to run the selected test between the times specitied in the time spin edits on the days shown in the days edit at the interval detined by the interval spin edit 25 Will TED Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto Test Configuration _tnnevtve tleetrente pestare Time Edits This document refers to the top two spin edits in the Schedules group box as the time edits These edits specity the start and stop times of the schedule with the top time edit as the start time In other words the selected test will only be run between the time shown in the top time edit and the time shown in the other time edit or run once at the time in the top time edit if Once Per Day is checked If
278. ter 15 Titan Series Auto Test Configuration Edit Test Points Window The Edit Test Points Window allows tor the creation deletion and editing of the points available for testing This window can be accessed trom the menus or toolbar of the Auto Test Contiguration Window it the current user has the Set Levels permission under Titan DLL in IED s Password Manger Note Changes made on this window are not live edits and do not take effect until the changes are saved via the OK button Edit Test Points BigReg Amp Frame 10 81 31 11 tell iol x Points S Chan 14 Ambient Gut Circuit Data 6 Chan 14 Amp Input EJ Point Description Chan 14 Ambient Out Point Type audio Voltage 7 Chan 14 Amp Output 5 Chan 14 Speaker Current 0 Listen Level o p 12 Chan 16 Direct Input Maximum Input Level zi Adjust a A 13 Chan 1B EQ Out 15 Chan 1B Ambient Gut Circuit Chain f Amp 14 Device Code Digital Gut 16 Chan 1B Amp Input 17 Chan 1B Amp Gutpuk 16 Chan 1B Speaker Current Collector Unit 21 Chan 24 Dir In Terminal 124 Handle None Input Number 59 39 Chan 24 Direct Input Add Point Del Point Reset Points Cancel Figure 15 12 Edit Test Points Window The Edit Test Schedules window can be broken down into five different sections These sections are listed here and discussed in greater detail in the following paragraphs e The Title Bar is the blue area at the very top of the window whic
279. that is used to validate the audio signal path trom the mic station to the 500C card This tab displays the results tor mic station test points The results grid is shown below in Figure 14 6 Note This applies to analog 500 and 508 series microphone stations only iew Test Results x ACS Output Test Results External Test Results Mic Test Results Me Model oan OOOO Ske De 7 15 Legacy Rack Mount Gate C5 Gate C5 Baggage Claim Area Ticketing Area Gate C4 Ext 1626 M Display Faults Only Close Figure 14 6 Mic Test Results Tab Mic Test Results Grid The columns in this result grid are as follows Mic This is the mic station number as defined in the mic station setup Model This is the model number of the mic station as detined in the mic station setup Location This is the description entered by the user in the mic station setup Set Lev This is the level that was recorded for the mic station test when a system set was performed This value is in dBu and is used as the reference level each time a test is executed 220 iin JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 14 596 Series Test Configuration Dev This is the variation in level between the set level and the actual measured level trom the last test When the deviation is outside of the allowable window the system will consider the monitor point in a fault status and report the fault accordingly 221 Will TED Chapter 14
280. the Points list box as well as on the Auto Tests and Auto Test Contiguration windows The Maximum Input Level droplist box allows editing of the anticipated maximum input level tor the selected point This value is used by the hardware to insure an accurate measurement while maintaining electrical protection to the measurement circuits When in doubt choose the highest reasonable value and lower it if the measurement at the point is too low The available choices are e 10 dB Low Line Level e 14 dB Line Level e 24 dB High Line Level e 30 dB 5965S sensor 8 Ohm speaker e 40 dB 70v Speaker Level The Circuit Chain droplist box contains a list of channel inputs and channel amplifiers It the selected point is on the input side of a channel the appropriate channel input should be selected likewise if the selected point is on the output side of a channel the appropriate channel amplifier should be selected For example if the point is on the speaker circuit of channel 3B then Amp 3B should be selected It the point is not on a channel controlled by this frame then None should be selected The Point Type droplist box specities whether the point is intended to measure Audio Voltage or Audio Current For points external to the frame this setting should always be Audio Voltage The Listen Level Adjust spin edit specities a value by which the audio level is adjusted when this point is monitored This allows the volume on th
281. the audio out to the local ACS associated fey with this 590 computer Play to zone Group fio term 10 Record Take Audio O Record audio For the take via the mic station Use Mic Station Edit Take f Rack a Show Text Mic Station Status Ready Record Text To Speech gt Convert the text in the Take Text Field inko LL eneerh wia Fhe Fever ka sneerh ennine Figure 11 4 Enterprise Take Editor Window The application will launch and automatically transter the take trom the ACS to the local computer and open the take file for editing as shown in Figure 1 1 5 Any errors encountered in the file transfer will be displayed on the status bar located at the bottom on the window 164 Will TED uoaraeiveemiseriamieimentgeg e TDP Ector Main Window Overview A graphical representation of the take audio is displayed in two sections of the application The top window displays the complete view ot the take audio The bottom window labeled Detail View displays a selected portion of the tile using the zoom features Calling the Zoom In and Out features only changes the Detail View Clicking on either window with the left or right mouse buttons moves the lett and right selection cursors seen in Figure 11 5 in white vertical lines respectively The cursors provide a mechanism to select or highlight regions of the take tor editing Selected regions have a blue background instead of black with the graph plot
282. the channels by which the Points are grouped The data cells in this column span several rows indicating that all of those rows belong to the zone s assigned channel In the case where the same zone is assigned to multiple channels the rows are grouped by channel not zone and therefore the zone will be displayed more than once As stated above the alternating blue and white backgrounds designate channel groupings and therefore each Zone cell completely spans each row of blue or white background Points The Points column lists each of the points available for testing in the amplifier frame The points are organized by channel so that all of the points on any given channel appear together This grouping is displayed by one Zone cell spanning several Points cells as well as by the alternating blue and white background lt Test Name gt top row of columns three and greater Each defined test has its own column header which spans one or more Frequency columns By Default there are two tests defined the System Test and the Periodic Test each of which by default soans one Frequency column For example in Figure 15 9 the System Test column header spans two Frequency columns 400Hz and 1Khz Essentially this means 24 7 Will TED Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto TestConfiguration _nmevative Electronic Designs 248 that both 400Hz and 1KHz tones are used separately during the Periodic Test Test Columns headers have
283. the first menu choice will be Logoff Selecting this function will immediately cause the user to be logged off the system When this is done the Logoff button and menu item changes to Login When a user is not logged into the system the button and menu will display Login Selecting this will display the Login dialog box as in Figure 13 4 Enter a valid user name and password and click the OK button to log into the system The F2 key can be used as a shortcut to access the Login Logoft functions Login security server d 7 IEI gee z gt a j l eh a 4 k YE i p PE Electronig Designs Figure 13 4 Login Dialog Box Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 13 Password Management Application Management This menu item or AppMgmt button trom the Password Manager utility is used to access the Application Area Management configuration This function is typically not available or grayed out to most users and is for IED factory personnel use only Examples of the configuration screens are shown below but the details of contiguring this section are beyond the scope of this manual xj Application Area Names 528 Control Creator 528 Control Designer Permissions ACSMonitor CCGUI 5 Entry Code Definitions DAP Editor 6 PDAF Messages Fault Logger System Settings L IODII 8 Mic Station Users MonitorTestDLL BF Send Data Print anager gt Priorities
284. the number of pixels 281 Chapter 17 VisDID Setup 282 Tag lt images gt lt imageXpath gt where x 1 8 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Definition Value A list container tor ad hoc image slots up to 8 These may be used tor system emergency evacuation conditions and directions for example The fully qualified windows path for the image to be used in this particular slot Example In a typical installation each DDC will be contigured with 2 emergency evacuation messages one which displays an evacuation arrow for fire and one for tornados e g seek shelter condition In this case lt image l path gt would be populated with the path for the tire evacuation image while lt image2path gt would be populated with the path for the tornado evacuation image Container for all VisDID Continuous lt continuous gt o specific setup information lt halfscreen gt lt stayontop gt lt hidemouse gt Allow VisDID Continuous to fill only half true fill half screen of the defined screen false fill whole screen Control VisDID Continuous on top true stay on top status in relation to other applications false do not stay on top Indicate whether VisDID Continuous true mouse cursor will be hidden should hide the mouse cursor false mouse cursor will be visible Container for all VisDID Immediate lt immediate gt n specific setup infor
285. the results for all monitor points that have been designated ACS Output as a device type The columns in the results grids are as follows 596 This is the 596 frame number where the monitor point is physically located Input This is the physical input on the 596 frame for the monitor point i e A1 A16 B1 B16 C1 C16 or DI D16 Name This is the name ot the test point and includes the location and zone number 218 min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 14 596 Series Test Configuration Audible Test Set Lev This is the level that was recorded for the audible test when a system set was performed This value is in dBu and is used as the reference level each time a test is executed Audible Test Dev This is the variation in level between the set level and the actual measured level trom the last test When the deviation is outside of the allowable window the system will consider the monitor point in a tault status and report the tault accordingly 20K Test Set Lev This is the level that was recorded for the periodic 20k test when a system set was pertormed This value is in dBu and is used as the reference level each time a test is executed 20K Test Dev This is the variation in level between the set level and the actual measured level trom the last test When the deviation is outside of the allowable window the system will consider the monitor point in a fault status and report the fault accordingly
286. the value in the grid e Delete a Fault Description Click on a row and press the DEL key on the keyboard 2 0 min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 16 System Supervision Relay Setup The Relay Setup window allows one to set up relays to trio when tault and clear conditions occur Figure 16 7 shows a typical Relay Setup window The window has two parts The top part allows selection of a relay device and the bottom part grouped under the Relay Setup heading allows setting up individual relays on the trame One uses the Relay Frame droplist to select the relay device that is to be contigured The Frame Address edit box allows one to edit the ED422 serial bus address of the relay frame This option is available only on an IED564 relay device and is grayed out for other relay device types Under the Relay Setup section the list box titled Available Relays allows one to pick and contigure individual relay outputs on the trame Initially all of the relays will have a red border and will be labeled Unassigned To setup up a relay performs the following steps 1 Check the checkbox labeled Relay is triggered by fault conditions 2 Enter a meaningful description that is to be displayed in the status bar of the Current Faults window see Figure 16 4 above when the relay is tripped due to a fault condition 3 Make a section in the Activation droplist The Activation droplist determines if the relay is to be latched i e stay a
287. ting the end point with the right mouse button 169 Will TED Chapter II DRP Editor S O Clicking on this option opens the window shown in Figure 11 13 The behavior of this option is identical to the Save to ACS menu option Close This option closes the active take tile The user is prompted with a contirmation dialog box as shown in Figure 1 1 14 if the file has changes that have not been saved Click the Yes button to save and close the tile A Save as dialog window will open and prompt for a filename if the file has never been saved If it has been saved before it will simply be saved using the same name Click the No button to close the tile without saving Click the Cancel button to close the window and return to the application The tile that was attempting to close will remain open Confirm P C tempg40z way has changed Do you want to sawe it i Mo Cancel Figure 11 14 Save Prompt Close All Select this option to close all open tiles The user will be prompted for action regarding any unsaved files Click the Yes button on the confirmation dialog to save and close the tile A Save as dialog window will open for new tiles that have never been saved Click the No button to close the tile without saving Click the Cancel button to close the confirmation dialog and return to the application leaving any remaining tiles open Click the Yes to All button to save all currently open tiles Files that already have a
288. tions live announcements recorded announcements PDRP messages and visual paging The following sections provide a description of Zone Group contiguration POMS NOUS assesses Sateen ode E OOSA 110 Zone Groups VIEWER lt v28 cccontees ans gantarcecceteosaxecesseouseueuvesee 111 Zowe Group EO eaea a ara a T E E 116 Genera TaD enres a acs See alee a se anes 116 109 Chapter 7 Zone Group Setup Zone Groups Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Zone Groups area collections of individual zones in a system that are treated as a single announcement destination When individual zones are programmed into zone group they can be accessed with a single entry code For example a very large open area in a facility may have 50 loudspeakers but each power amplifier can only power 10 loudspeakers Therefore the 50 loudspeakers will be broken up into tive 5 individual power amplitier channels each of which is a zone with 10 loudspeakers Physically all ot these loudspeakers are located in the same room and any page to that room will always need to go to all five 5 zones A zone group would be made for this room that is made up of all five 5 zone outputs Therefore to configure a mic station or PDRP message to play to this room all 5 zones only a single zone group need be selected Zone groups can contain any number of analog audio 500D Card zones Titan digital audio zones visual display and relay zones Typically there are three d
289. to close the PDRP Message Viewer 135 Will TED Chapter Q PDRP Messages Innovative Electronic Designs PDRP Editor The PDRP Editor window is displayed when either the Add or Edit operations are performed The editor window has five tabs across the top General Languages amp User Groups Play Schedule Assemble Take and Destination By default the General tab is shown and each tab is displayed by clicking on it with the left mouse button There are three buttons located along the bottom of the window that are common to all tabs OK Click the OK button to save changes and close the window Cancel Click the Cancel button to discard any changes and close the window Play Click the Play button to play the message to either the defined destination or a user selected destination Figure 9 8 shows the resulting window to set the play options for the message PDRP Editor j x General Languages User Groups Play Schedule Assemble Take Destination EN English US Assemble 9991 1 second silence 7297 Smoking is permitted in designated areas only Please refrain From smoking while walking throughout the building Assembled PDRP Message Play to Zone Zonemap Play to selected zones Play to this zonemap fio All Call OK Cancel Figure 9 8 Play to Zone Zonemap Pop up Play to Selected Zones Select this option to play the message to the zones as detined on the Dest
290. tor unit group If a sensor is currently selected tor a channel then all other groups will be grayed out and not available tor selection To change to a sensor that is not located in the currently selected group tirst un check all sensor assignments then any sensor group will be available tor selection 4 Click the OK button to apply the changes Clicking the Cancel button will close the window without applying any changes 3 Will TED Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Innovative Electronic Designs Ambient Sensor Description Each ambient sensor channel can have a logical description assigned to it that allows it to be easily associated with its physical location in the tacility The description can be edited simply by right clicking on the sensor name in the Ambient Sensor Assignment and typing in a new name in the description box as shown in Figure 2 16 Edit Description Training Room 9032N5 if Sensor 4 Figure 2 16 Ambient Sensor Description Click the OK button to apply the description change or select Cancel to close the window and discard any edits Note Sensor descriptions can also be assigned by lett clicking on any collector unit T9032NS in the tree view and selecting Sensor Meters to bring up the sensor meter display The description can then be edited by right clicking on a meter to bring up the edit window as shown in Figure 2 16 This allows the sensor to be identitied prior to entering a d
291. trieve the takes but lists the numbers of the takes that are already on the ACS For example Figure 11 28 shows all English takes in the range 9401 through 9999 Once initiated the user can stop the take listing operation by clicking on the Cancel List button at any time The software will stop searching for more takes and list only those already discovered 179 Will TED Chapter 1 DRPEditor tinea tcetromte nestns Take List Take Filter Start e401 Stop 2999 Language Jo English Available Takes on the ACS Figure 11 28 Take List Window Populated Help Menu The help menu has only one option as shown in Figure 11 29 Selecting the About menu item displays the window shown in Figure 11 30 This window displays the program name version number release date and copyright information Help Jo About Figure 11 29 Help Menu About l About DRP Editor A IED DRP Editor 2 0 0 0 7 31 2009 Innovative Electronic Designs 9701 Taylorsville Road Louisville KY 40299 Copyrighti 2003 2009 Innovative Electronic Designs LUC All Rights Resenrad Figure 11 30 About Window 180 min JED uoaraeWetnisetiamivimentgeg HTT TDR Ector Toolbar The purpose of the toolbar is to provide quick access to commonly used application commands most of which are also accessible from the menus The toolbar is shown in Figure 11 31 E E 5 B E Local I z Record ssib a o8 R dF EEE
292. ts e Lock Time This specifies the number of minutes to lock the system allow no more login attempts atter a string of unsuccesstul login attempts Automatic Logout Options e Enabled When checked the system will automatically logout the current user after a period of inactivity as specified in Auto Logout Time minutes field e Auto Logout Time minutes This specities the amount of time the system will wait before initiating the automatic logout Language Tab When users are created they are assigned a language that is used to determine tor some applications the actual language in which the application will operate when that user logs into the system When a new user is created the system will detault to the language selected here The current default language will appear highlighted in the list To change the default language highlight the language in the list and click the Set as Default button Now new users will be created with this language selected by default Each user can then be adjusted to use the language that is appropriate IED Security Server Parameters X Default Language English Installed Languages Figure 13 9 IED Security Server Parameters Language Tab 201 Will TED Chapter 13 Password Management Innovative Electronic Designs Verify The Verify function only available trom the Password Manager utility and is used to test a username password combination without logging out the curr
293. uence and test are used somewhat interchangeably in this document This window can be accessed trom the menus or toolbar of the Auto Test Contiguration Window Note Changes made on this window are not live edits and do not take effect until the changes are saved via the OK button Edit Test Schedules BigReg Amp Frame i _ oO x Test ae gt Test Sequence Description 2 System Test Periodic Test V Save OK Results W Save Fault Results W Save Unknown Results Delete I Save Set Results Schedules For selected Sequence 00 00 00 00 00 00 5MTW TFS V Enable Schedule Once Per Day nm Zul Between 12 00 00 aM in al and 12 00 00 am on MT WTFS5 every feo seconds Figure 15 10 Edit Test Schedules Window The Edit Test Schedules window can be broken down into four different sections These sections are listed here and discussed in greater detail in the following paragraphs e The Title Bar is the blue area at the very top of the window which contains general information pertaining to the whole window e The Test Sequences group box e The Schedules tor selected Sequences group box e The OK and Cancel buttons Title Bar In addition to the window name the title bar at the top of the Auto Test Configuration window displays the following information about the amplifier frame which runs the tests being edited in this window e The frame s description e The frame s IP
294. ure 15 7 provides the ability to edit the points which are selected to be in each test as well as the positive and negative deviation thresholds tor each selected point as 2s a titan zone 9 5 Chan 14 Ambient Out 0D ID 6 Chan 1A Amp Input a5 a5 Foo f 7 Chan 14 Amp Output TA os os M 25 25 M o25 25 8 Chan 1A Speaker Curent VM o5 os M 25 25 M 25 25 titan zone 10 15 Chan 16 Ambient out Doo Do n D s 16 chan 16 Amp Input OT fi 17 Chan iB Amp Cutout jos os M as 25 Mi 2s 2s 18 Chan 1B Speaker Curent M os os M 25 25 M 25 25 titan znne 11 25 Chan 24 Amhient Out Mo IMI IMI z Figure 15 7 Point Selection Grid The top of the Point Selection Grid contains header rows which have white text on a blue background that fades from dark to light Header rows do not move when the grid is scrolled Before discussing the meaning of the text in the header rows it is first necessary to understand the non header rows in the grid Each of these non header rows represents a specific location or test point in a channel s signal chain where audio levels can be measured For Titan series amplifier frames there are four test points per channel additional points may be available in some cases These points are grouped by channel and each channel group is delineated by alternating light blue and white backgrounds Information about
295. ure of the tile must be maintained sample File lt vis_contig gt lt htmltimeout_msec gt 10000 lt htmltimeout_msec gt lt blackouttime_msec gt 80000 lt blackouttime_msec gt lt maxdhtmlwait_msec gt 60000 lt maxdhtmlwait_msec gt lt screens gt lt screen signid 1 zoneid 1 displayid 1 gt lt top gt 0 lt top gt lt lett gt O lt lett gt lt height gt 768 lt height gt lt width gt 1024 lt width gt lt images gt lt imagel path gt c ied vis evacuateRight git lt imagel path gt lt image2path gt c ied vis test git lt image2path gt lt image3path gt lt images gt lt continuous gt lt halfscreen gt talse lt halfscreen gt lt stayontop gt talse lt stayontop gt lt hidemouse gt true lt hidemouse gt lt continuous gt lt immediate gt lt halfscreen gt talse lt halfscreen gt lt stayontop gt talse lt stayontop gt lt scrollrate gt 2 lt scrollrate gt lt timerinterval gt 3 lt timerinterval gt lt compressratio gt 1 0 lt compressratio gt lt justification gt justCenter lt justitication gt lt holdtimeperchar gt 0 1 lt holdtimeperchar gt lt hidewhendone gt true lt hidewhendone gt lt hidemouse gt true lt hidemouse gt lt color val 000000 gt lt defaults gt lt cellholdtime gt 120 lt cellholdtime gt lt linesperpage gt 4 lt linesperoage gt lt backcolor val 000000 gt lt font gt Arial Unicode MS lt color val FFFF00 gt lt font gt lt director
296. use as the master is selected trom the adjacent droplist box e Allow Specific User Permissions Select this option to restrict access to this button only to the users selected in the window Check the box next to each user that should be allowed access Two shortcut buttons are to the right of the window Check All Clear All to allow quick selection or de selection of all items in the list Note Because of hardware limitations there is a limited number 31 of different Allow Specitic User Permissions available so it s recommended to use the Allow Same User Permissions As option as trequently as possible Preview This is a preview of the button as it will appear on the mic station It is useful to see the text layout of the button using the colors selected 100 min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Scroll Boxes Chapter 6 528 Interface Designer Scroll boxes provide a list of items that are selected to pertorm an action Each item in a scroll box is essentially the same as a button but placed together in a group of other similar items Using scroll boxes allows the design of a more intuitive and organized user interface and reduces the number of buttons For example a button can be created titled PDRP Messages and assigned an action to open a scroll box that has a list of PDRP messages available tor that mic station Access to each PDRP message in the list can be restricted based on individual user permissions Scro
297. use the 20KHz signal setting is used by the Periodic test moditication of the 20KHz setting is discouraged With the exception of the 2OKHz Periodic Test all signal settings are available tor use with all tests other than the Periodic Test Test Data The Test Data group box contains the commonly used edits for signal settings Each of these edits is discussed in the following list Setting Name This edit box provides the ability to assign the signal setting a human readable name This name is displayed in the Test Settings list box on the left It is not necessary to include the frequency of the test setting in the name since the Auto Test windows automatically display the frequency whenever a Setting Name is displayed Frequency This droplist box provides the ability to set the frequency of the tone generated by this signal setting While several trequencies are provided in the drop list it is also possible to type in other frequencies in the range of zero to 20 000 Hertz If the Waveform droplist box is set to None DC the Frequency droplist box changes to zero and cannot be edited Test Signal Level This spin edit allows adjustment of the signal level for the selected signal setting Generally this value should be in the neighborhood of 36 0 dBts for audible tones to avoid extremely loud audible tones The valid range of values for the Test Signal Level ranges trom 50 0 dBts to 10 0 dBts iin JED Innovative
298. user is the member of a group or company Groups Companies Droplist box used to assign the group or company to this user Passcode The numeric passcode that this user will use to log into a mic station PIN The Personal Identification Number for this user in installations with higher security requirements that require a user to log in with both a Passcode and PIN Not shown but may be visible in some installations User Language The preferred language for the mic station user interface In multi lingual installations the mic station will automatically change to this language upon user log in Graphic Permission A numeric representation of the User Groups selected for this user This is a read only field and cannot be edited User Groups The permission groups to which this user belongs Add New Mic Station User The steps necessary to add a new Mic Station User are as follows _ Click the Add button in the Mic Station User Viewer Enter a meaningful Username Select if the user is a member of a Group Airline or Company followed by the appropriate selection trom the droplist box Enter a tour or eight digit numeric Passcode The size of the Passcode is determined by the setup in System Settings and by detault set to a maximum length of tour characters Please refer to the appropriate section for more information on changing the length of passcodes 85 Chapter 5 Mic Station Security Will TED Innovati
299. ut Repeat Last Departure Select Seq Step Caption i Add FAS Language paai elk Change Sequence Fight Delayed Background Color E Flight Cancelled I Use Default Colors Flight Gate Change Text Color Flight Messages W Local Gate Areas Permissions C Allow All User Permissions General Messages ae Security Breach Allow Same User Permissions As Next Departure x Mute System C Allow Specific User Permissions al ia ee O All Call O Hawaiian Airlines O WestJet j s All Terminals O All Call Emergency O go O Air Canada O American Airlines Island Air O Air Pacific Clear A O Delta Air Lines O Continental Airlines Japan Airlines O United Airlines O Alaska Airlines O Air Japan O US Airways O Omni Air Intemational O JALways O Delta Connection O Northwest Airlines O China Air O Southwest Airlines O Korean Airlines O Jetstar Airways gt e aoa E Scroll Boxes Select Flight Message Select Message Select Delay Message Select Cancel Message Security Breach Messages Terminals Figure 6 14 Button Properties The controls available on this panel are as follows Button Action This detines what will happen when a button is pressed There are three options available e Show a Scroll Box This action will result in opening the scroll box that is selected trom the adjacent droplist box e Key an Entry Code This action will transmit the code entered in the adjacent entry box to the announcement contr
300. utput This selects the monitor point located immediately after the EQ object in the digital signal flow This signal will include the audio mix with any filters that have been applied using EQ This signal will not include any ambient noise analysis level compensation or the test tone used for system supervision Ambient Output This selects the last monitor point in the digital signal flow and includes the audio mix with filters applied using EQ delay level adjustments made using ambient analysis compensation and the test tone used for system supervision Amplifier Input This selects the monitor point after the digital to analog conversion immediately before the analog audio signal is sent to the input of the amplifier This is the true analog signal that is sent to the amplifier that has been converted back to digital audio to allow remote monitoring Amplifier Output This selects the monitor point that directly monitors the analog audio signal at the output of the amplitier card at the integrated load sensor Each amplitier output channel on a T9160 maintrame includes a speaker line load supervision module that directly monitors the current in the loudspeaker circuit This monitor point is the analog audio trom this current to voltage supervision device and provides the best representation of the audio signal that is sent to the loudspeakers min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Note T
301. vative Eleetromte Designs 000 Chapter 16 System Supervision View Faults Double click this icon to open up the Current Faults window that shows all the taults that are currently in the system Figure 3 shows an example window ate 5 Mic Staton Contrad Line Failure FAUF 2012 5 11 45 PM FPLF 2012 5 11 45 PM Titan IPAU T9160 Subsysbem Cadi Comprem Faure L72012 S1417 PM FPLUF 2012 5 14 17 PM Faut Ie 2 Device 1D 557 Fault Type 4 Fauk Number 1 Optional Automatically refresh current fault list Refresh Total Faults 2 Figure 16 3 Current Faults Window Showing Faults In The System At a glance the grid shows the description of a fault the first time it occurred and for recurring faults the last time it occurred Additional intormation about a tault can be viewed by selecting a fault trom the grid This is shown in Figure 16 3 above via the light blue box below the second fault listed These details are typically usetul tor doing additional diagnosis or advanced troubleshooting or to report to the manufacturer technical support personnel The Current Faults window only retrieves the current faults on startup and does not automatically retresh the list on a timer as it is a resource and network intensive operation Clicking on the Refresh button will update the grid with fresh data trom the Service To automatically update the grid on a timer simply check the Automatically refresh current fault list checkbox It System
302. ve Electronic Designs 4 optional Enter a four or eight character long numeric PIN if the field is visible The size and visibility ot the PIN is determined by the setup in System Settings By detault the PIN is not visible and not required Please refer to the appropriate section for more information on PIN 5 Select the language for this user trom the droplist box 6 Select the appropriate entries from the User Groups listbox by clicking on the box next to the group name 7 Click on the OK button to save and return to the Mic Station Users viewer The newly added Mic Station User will appear at the end of the list in the viewer Note The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to discard changes and return to the viewer form Edit Click the Edit button to bring up the editor form for the user selected in the Mic Station User viewer Alternatively double clicking on a user in the viewer will also open the editor Editor x Mic Station User Username User Grouptsi Groups Groups Companies IED Passcode 7436 User Language f English Graphic Permission 000002EFF hexadecimal All Call All Call Emergency American Airlines Delta Air Lines United Airlines US Airways Delta Connection Southwest Airlines Hawaiian Airlines Gol FAS Island Air Continental Airlines Alaska Airlines Omni Air International Alor FRiaieck Airlines d Pr
303. way Detail View Not logged in Total 40 615 L 18 41s R 22 52s Figure 1 1 22 Detail View Zoom Out Click this function to display a broader view of the waveform in the Detail View Zoom Out can be called as many times as needed until the entire waveform is displayed in the Detail View Zoom Into Selected Range Click this option to magnify the selected region to fill the width ot Detail View Figure 11 23 shows an example of this feature Notice the left and right selection cursors are at the lett and right edge of the Detail View window and the differences of the Detail View windows of Figure 11 22 and Figure 11 23 The user can select another region and use this teature again to reveal details of that region in the Detail View 175 ltl TED Chapter 1 1 DRP Editor Innovative Electronic Designs DRP Editor Pije x File Edit Yiew Tools Help Local 1 p Record jesl amp i 4 C IR db HEE Select From 438786 Al To 92197 zj volume fio zj K a see Ref Level 4 90 A dB EJ untitled1 GE untitled2 C temp 9401 way EI C temp 9402 way Detail view Not logged in Total 40 615 L 27 42s R 30 76s Figure 11 23 Detail View Zoom to Selected Range Zoom Out Fully This option removes all zoom effects applied to the Detail View and will display the complete waveform in the width of the Detail View Tools Menu The Tools menu provides options to p
304. when the status is OK The status indicator indicates the following three 3 conditions e Green The amplifier card is functioning properly e Yellow The amplifier card has failed but is currently backed up by the backup amplitier card it installed A tault condition exists but the channel is still functioning due to the redundant amplifier e Red The amplifier card has tailed and is not backed up Channel Status The second indicator indicates the status of the ground fault detector tor the currently selected channel The status indicator indicates two 2 conditions e Green No ground fault has been detected on the loudspeaker line e Red A ground fault has been detected on the loudspeaker line Caution T6400 Series amplifier cards are balanced amplifiers It is possible for a ground fault to be present and the amplifier will continue to drive the loudspeaker line and the system will appear to be functioning properly A ground fault can present a hazard to both people and equipment and should be corrected as soon as possible when detected Channel Out The Channel Out controls are used to adjust the overall output level of the channel A signal level meter is located on the tar right to display This meter displays the real time level of the digital audio signal immediately betore the digital to analog conversion The output attenuation of the channel can be adjusted by either dragging the slider to the appropriate
305. window shows the Editor tor an existing take There are three tabs on this window System wide Take Record Play Take and VIS Editor xf System wide Take Record Play Take vis Take Number Language JEN English US Take Type Gender 20 Curbside Parking Female Duration jig Seconds This is a generic take Take Text This is a special announcement For security reasons unattended vehicles in front of the terminal will be ticketed and immediately towed This area is only for embarking and disembarking of passengers 4 Previous p Next Figure 10 9 Takes Editor System wide Take Tab Details for the configuration options available on each tab are defined below For step by step instructions on adding editing or deleting takes refer to the previous section There are two buttons located along the bottom of the window that are common to all tabs OK Click the OK button to save changes and close the window Cancel Click the Cancel button to discard any changes and close the window System wide Take Tab The System wide Take tab is shown in Figure 10 9 Take Number This is a unique identification number for the take Most take numbers in the system are reserved for existing takes in the library The take range 9401 through 9500 has been reserved for user added takes Use a number within this range for any new takes 156 min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 10 T
306. x as shown in Figure 6 4 3 Highlight the template in the window and click the OK button to load it Double clicking on the template name in the list will also cause it to open Open Template x IED Training Room French Template IMPORTED ECP Airport zeg test 2 Figure 6 4 Open Template Add a New Template 1 Open the 528 Interface Designer by clicking on the icon located in the IED Application Bar or on the desktop 2 Click the New Template button located on the toolbar 3 Enter a name for the template in the Template Name field 4 Click the Save Template button to save the new template 91 Will TED Chapter 6 528 Interface Designer Innovative Electronic Designs 5 Add and edit buttons and scroll boxes as needed Save the template periodically to ensure changes are not accidently lost Rename a Template 1 Open the 528 Interface Designer by clicking on the icon located in the IED Application Bar or on the desktop 2 Click the Open Template button on the toolbar This will display the Open Template window as shown in Figure 6 4 3 Highlight the template in the window and click the OK button to load it Double clicking on the template name in the list will also cause it to open 4 Edit the name in the Template Name field 5 Click the Save Template button to save the template with the new name Delete a Template 1 Open the 528 Interface Designer by clicking on the icon located in the IED Application Bar
307. x or by pressing the spacebar when the cell containing the checkbox is highlighted e Dev and Dev The Dev and Dev columns allow modification of the deviation thresholds tor that point frequency test A deviation threshold is the amount a measurement can vary trom the Set value for the same point frequency test before a fault is declared The positive deviation or Dev is the amount the measured value can vary above the set value the negative deviation or Dev is the amount the measured value can vary below the set value There are a number of shortcuts available in the Point Selection Grid Arrow keys can be used to navigate the grid The space bar provides a shortcut method to check uncheck checkboxes The check boxes in the header row can be used to select or deselect all the checkboxes in the column below them Deviation values can be cut and pasted using standard Windows cut and paste Ctrl C and Ctrl V respectively If a deviation value is pasted to a point not selected for testing the grid automatically selects that point for testing Right clicking on a deviation displays the Copy Deviation pop up menu which allows the copying of the selected deviation value to other points under the trequency Each choice is detined below Figure 15 8 iin JED Knnovative Electronic Besigne 00 Chapter 15 Titan Series Auto Test Configuration k Copy To Checked Copy To Checked Copy to Checked Copy To All Copy
308. x or slider 34 Will TED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Channel Settings Storage Channel settings may be saved and recalled to and from a tile This feature saves time when several zones share similar acoustical characteristics and or use the same speaker types Also it is recommended that all settings be saved to tiles and copied to other media e g a USB drive as a backup sateguard Save Channel Settings a ae Click on the File menu and select Save as The Save Channel Settings dialog will appear as shown in Figure 2 21 Enter a tile name in the File name droplist box Select the XML as the Save as type droplist box Select a tile path in the Save in dialog box Click the Save button Save Channel Settings 14 9 Gate C4 2 Save in Fe My Documents 1 i 3 My Computer My Recent My Network Places Documents IEDNET E Junk Channel Settings 14 9 Gate C4 xml Desktop Exporteds28MicTemplate xml French xml S Training Room IPAU 10 2 131 125 Settings xml My Documents oe My Computer E File name Channel Settings 14 9 Gate C4 biy Network Save as type KM L files xrnl Cancel E Figure 2 21 Save Channel Settings Load Channel Settings l 2 GS Or ga po Click on the File menu and select Load Click the Yes button to acknowledge that loading the curve will overwrite the current settings
309. y Settings amp ACS Mic and Zone Monitor N i eZ TEDEP Commander exe g IED Enterprise Dashboard EA TED Print Manager PasswordManagerContig exe Figure 11 1 DRP Editor Menu Icon Also there is typically an icon for the IED DRP Editor on the IED Application Bar software as shown in Figure 11 2 Jc Figure 11 2 DRP Editor Application Bar Icon Launching the application trom the Tools menu or trom the Application Bar sottware produces the window shown in Figure 11 3 The application starts with an empty workspace as indicated by the dark gray background and the empty tile navigation tab Take tiles can be opened retrieved or recorded using the appropriate menu and toolbar functions DRP Editor Mi x File Edit view Tools Help jDe ee V Local D Record RR jv OG i db HEE Select From bpo og To po Volume p Me qr id Ref Level 4 90 24 de User Zaid Ahmed ff OY Figure 11 3 DRP Editor 163 Will TED Chapter IIT DRP Edito tative tectonic Destine Alternatively the application can be launched from the Take Editor in Enterprise by clicking on the Edit Take button under the Record Play Take tab page as shown in Figure 11 4 The application is typically opened in this manner to edit the audio in the take recorded using the features on the Record Play Take tab of the Take Editor Window Editor z System wide Take Record Play Take vrs Play To ACS Play
310. yright 1998 2009 Fp Innovative Electronic Sees Designs LLC File Information Version 2 0 3 20 Nov 24 2009 Date Modified 11 24 2009 4 35 21 PM Size S603KB Location CHTEDWED Enterprise Lib T9160 0LL Figure 2 30 About Box EQ Options The EQ Options menu is only available when the EQ form is active It contains tive 5 different controls that alter the display of the intormation in the EQ window There are ten 10 vertical divisions on the frequency response graph and the range of the graph can be altered to best meet the needs of the application by configuring the Legend Scale and 0 dB Location settings The Frequency Scale setting controls the horizontal axis EQ Options Legend Scale d Frequency Scale F 0 dB Location d w Show Gain Show Phase Figure 2 31 EQ Options Menu Legend Scale This setting alters the vertical range of the graph by determining the number of decibels dB represented by each division of the graph The available settings are 3dB 6dB 9dB and 12dB EQ Options Options a Y 3810 Frequency Sca 6 dB Div 0 dE Location 9 dB Diy 12 dB Di Show Gain tele Show Phase Figure 2 32 EQ Display Legend Scale 42 min JED Innovative Electronic Designs Chapter 2 Titan Channel Configuration Frequency Scale This menu controls the horizontal divisions of the frequency response graph EQ Options Legend Scale d 0 dB Location Decade w Show Gain Show Phase

Enterprise User Manual 901C- Low Res

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents